JP2017189589A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having features on display means.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 100 includes a first decorative symbol display device 208L and a second decorative symbol display device 208M. The first decorative symbol display device 208L can display a plurality of kinds of icons. One icon among the plurality of kinds of icons is a variation icon, and one icon among the plurality of kinds of icons is a reservation icon. The second decorative symbol display device 208M can display a notice display. The notice display is started to be displayed from a variation stop of a certain variable display till a move of the reservation icon is finished.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming table provided with a display means is known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, there is room for improvement in display means in the conventional game machine.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The above purpose is
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation display”),
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the variation display during a certain variation (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”),
The second icon is an icon related to the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) performed after the first variation display,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of animation,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a certain display,
One of the plurality of types of animation is an animation for deleting the first icon (hereinafter referred to as “first animation”),
After the stop display of the first variation display, the movement display of the second icon is performed,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed between the end of the first animation and the end of the moving display of the second icon.
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of an effect in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of an effect in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the modification 1 of Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the modification 2 of Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the modification 3 of Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 5 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 6 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 7 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 8 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 9 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 10 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 11 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 12 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of meter production in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 40 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which performs a meter production | presentation and makes a big hit in steps. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 42 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of effects by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG. It is a figure for explaining in detail various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the rank improvement effect which tells whether a meter display changes stepwise. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 46 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the rank improvement effect shown in FIG. 47 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the re-lottery which may continue from FIG. 48 (41) in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini game which tells whether the meter display appears step by step. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which a big hit is decided by the said fluctuation | variation when a meter display will be in a full tank state. It is a figure which shows the example in which a meter display is displayed in a holding frame in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which acquires and stocks a mini item when the meter of a meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which several items are stocked in one full tank of a meter display in steps. It is a figure which shows the example in which the meter display of a full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example which is digested without being stocked even if an item appears when the meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one side disappears. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 58 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which a display is started in the state which accumulated the meter display of the increase type to the middle. It is a figure which shows an example of the meter production | presentation by the meter display which shows a numerical value in steps. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 61 changes according to the operation of the operating means. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect different from the meter effect demonstrated so far in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an error generate | occur | produces during the display of a meter display in steps. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 64 in stages. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 1000 as a game stand by the modification of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home television set having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. The game machine 5000 is shown, (e) has shown the data server 6000 which memorize | stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance to change the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the player's operation. When a button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, and a setting operation unit (or “second chance button”) that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk) 137), a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a card unit (CR unit) to lend a ball, a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return a player's balance, A ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234, a game that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of universal figure floating games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, are variable around the rendering device 206. Winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), or wins without winning any of the winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting ports 228, 229 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. Further, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The 4th symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged side by side. For example, LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to FIG. 1 and the lower lamp corresponds to FIG. The fourth symbol display device 248 may include only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the 4th symbol display apparatus may be provided in the production | presentation apparatus 206 (center accessory) like this example. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors An image stored in the ROM 406 based on a sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402 and a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads over data or the like to display an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIG. 5A to FIG. 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows seven types of special charts, "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G", as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state shown in FIG. 11 (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the normal random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. 229, it is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won, a prize ball provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting ports 228 and 229, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a combination of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general-purpose display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (the common diagram A or B shown in FIG. 5D) and the off symbol (the common diagram C shown in FIG. 5D). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to 1 or more as a start condition, and is executed using a pair of the first common winning random number value and the common random number value in the common random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the obtained normal figure winning random number value in the obtained ordinary figure starting information, the value of the ordinary figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the determination table for the success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 9A and 9B described later). (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 9C). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special figure 1 stop table To set indicating that it is in. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the special figure determination table (FIG. 11 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12A, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The predetermination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 8B to 8E) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 8B to 8E illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special chart G” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special chart G” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8C, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 8C, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 8 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 8D, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage section, “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is not the stop symbol information but the prefetch result. May be stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8E, the storage area “pending 1” stores “timer 3” as timer number information, the storage area “pending 2” stores “timer 5” as timer number information, No timer number information is stored in the storage areas “hold 3” and “hold 4”. In FIG. 8E, a state in which the timer number information is not stored is expressed as “none”. In addition, when timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the success / failure result.

  In the above description, an example is given in which stop symbols and timer numbers are pre-determined, and stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. While being stored in the result storage unit, it may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetching result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of the success / failure determination table used when the success / failure determination is performed in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B includes items of “normal probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal / failure determination table used when the probability of normalization at the time of determination of success / failure is low. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the winning probability is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a normal / failure determination table used in the case where the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 9B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 9C shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful, the allocation ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the normal-game A and 50% for the normal-game B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the general figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. A is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 10A to 10D show an example of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  Fig.11 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is the big hit, the special symbol A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG.11 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  Fig.12 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the case where the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG.12 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1 and has a longer open time of the attacker (or a larger R number). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 14A shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  The electric long-long opening effect process shown in FIG. 14 (a) is a normal symbol change start from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 13 (a). This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as an electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 14, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 14B shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decoration display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 14 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 15B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 15C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

Example 1
FIG. 16 shows an effect example in Example 1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 16A to 16R show the production state at each point in time in this order. 16 (a) to 16 (r) show only the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. In each figure, the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a downward arrow.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16R, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has an image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the fourth symbol display device 248 shown in FIG. A square 4th symbol display area 700 capable of displaying the 4th symbol in the upper left corner of the image, and a circular shaped 4th symbol display area 700 which can display the 4th symbol on the right side of the 4th symbol display area 700. A 4 symbol display area 702 is provided. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. During the execution of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game, the fourth symbol display area 700 displays the fourth symbol of the white square, and the fourth symbol display area 702 displays the black circle of the fourth symbol. While the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variable games are not being executed, the fourth symbol display area 700 displays a black square fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 702 displays a white circular fourth symbol. The fourth symbol display area 700 displays the white fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 702 displays the black fourth symbol, whereby the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. During the execution of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 variable game, the fourth symbol displayed alternately in white and black as if the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area 700 is flashing. May be.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16R, the fifth symbol display area 704 capable of displaying the fifth symbol (mini-decorated symbol) in the upper right corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is provided. The fifth symbol display area 704 has the same display mode as the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol whose display size is smaller than the decorative symbol are displayed from the left. They can be displayed in this order toward the right. While the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game is being executed, the symbols in the middle left and right of the fifth symbol display area 704 are “1” → “2” → “3” →... → “9” → “10 Fluctuation display of the 5th symbol which is switched in the order of “→” 1 ”→... Is executed. In each figure, the variation display of the fifth symbol in the fifth symbol display area 704 is represented by a downward arrow. In addition, in the fifth symbol display area 704, similar to the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed to notify the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination. Is possible.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure variation game is finished, after the decorative symbol variation display (the third symbol variation display) is terminated, the fourth symbol variation display and the fifth symbol variation display are simultaneously performed. finish. It should be noted that the variation display of the fifth symbol may end last, and the variation stop may be performed when the variation of the fifth symbol display area 704 is stopped.

  A variation icon display region 706 capable of displaying a variation icon is provided at the lower left corner of the effect display region 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area 706 when the hold is consumed and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon, whether or not the special figure fluctuation game is successful can be notified (predicted by the fluctuation) with a predetermined reliability (expected degree). Below the variation icon display area 706, a horizontally long elliptical variation icon display position image e indicating the display position of the variation icon is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 16A, the variation icon f1 is displayed above the variation icon display position image e.

  A button image (button icon) 708 simulating a chance button 136 is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure. A character string image of “PUSH” is displayed in a portion corresponding to the pressing surface of the chance button 136 of the button image 708. The button image 708 is also displayed outside the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid. The button image 708 is displayed in white except during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and is displayed in red during the operation valid period. Note that the button image 708 may be displayed only during the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a sub display device 800. Here, the positional relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 800 will be described. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, a position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front”, and a position farther from the player than the “front” is indicated. Indicated as “after”. Therefore, for example, the one closer to the player is expressed as “front”, and the one farther from the player than “front” is expressed as “rear”. The side closer to the player is referred to as “front side”, and the side farther from the player than the “front side” is referred to as “rear side”.

  The sub display device 800 is disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 800 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and includes a horizontally long rectangular image display area. The sub display device 800 can be moved in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the screen by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown). Further, the sub display device 800 can be driven by a rotation driving motor (not shown) to rotate the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the screen. The drive control (movement control) of the sub display device 800 is executed by the second sub control unit 500, and the display control is executed by the first sub control unit 400. In addition, you may provide the control part which performs the display control of the sub display apparatus 800 separately. In the state shown in FIG. 16A, the sub display device 800 is located at the initial position. The initial position of the sub display device 800 is a position where the upper half of the sub display device 800 overlaps the lower center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the pachinko machine 100 is viewed from the front side. The lower end of the movement range of the sub display device 800 is a position where the upper end side of the sub display device 800 is below the lower end side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the lower end of the movement range of the sub display device 800 may be the initial position. The sub display device 800 may not be provided. In this case, the display on the sub display device 800 described below may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of each of the left middle right symbol of the decorative symbol, at least one symbol of the left middle right symbol of the decorative symbol, or all of the left middle right symbol of the decorative symbol may be displayed on the sub display device 800. .

  As illustrated in FIG. 16A, a region surrounded by a horizontally long rectangular virtual broken line below the image display region of the sub display device 800 is a special figure 1 hold icon capable of displaying a special figure 1 hold icon. A display area 802 is provided. The lower end side of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 802 of this example is coincident with the lower end side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display area 208.

  In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, it is possible to display the number of special figure 1 hold icons corresponding to the number of hold in the special figure 1. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, the number of special figure 1 hold icons can be notified by the number of special figure 1 hold icons, and the hold state can be determined by the display mode of each special figure 1 hold icon. Special Figure 1 It is possible to notify (pre-reading notice) whether or not a variable game is successful with a predetermined reliability (expectation).

  The special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area, and the second to fourth areas are similarly displayed in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold can be displayed.

  On the lower part of each of the first to fourth areas, hold icon display position images g1 to g4 indicating the display position of the special figure 1 hold icon are displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 16A, the special figure 1 hold icon h1 is displayed above the hold icon display position image g1 in the first area. Similarly, special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4 are displayed above the hold icon display position images g2 to g4 in the second area to the fourth area.

  The special figure 1 hold icon displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 may be displayed in a display size different from the change icon (for example, a display size smaller than the change icon). This may facilitate identification of the special figure 1 hold icon and the fluctuation icon.

  In each of FIGS. 16A to 16R, the special figure 2 hold number is 0, so the special figure 2 hold icon display area is not provided, and the special figure 2 hold icon is not displayed. When the special figure 2 hold number is 1 or during power support, the special figure 2 hold icon can be displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 800 above the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802. A special figure 2 hold icon display area is provided.

  Note that the variation icon may be displayed not only on the variation icon display area 706 of the decorative symbol display device 208 but also on the sub display device 208. Note that the variable icon display area 706 may be provided in the image display area of the sub display device 800 instead of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208. In this case, the variation icon display area 706 may not be provided in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the special figure 1 hold icon and the special figure 2 hold icon may be displayed not on the sub display device 800 but on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in each figure, a background image of a wilderness with rotten trees (hereinafter referred to as “wilderness background”) is displayed. A background image of the castle town (hereinafter referred to as “castle town background”) is displayed. The background image is displayed on the back of each image display area. In the present embodiment, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the background image displayed on the sub display device 800 are different. The background image displayed on the decorative design display device 208 and the background image displayed on the sub display device 800 may be the same.

  As shown in the drawings, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an effect movable body 900 instead of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. The effect movable body 900 is disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and has a circular flat plate shape. The front surface of the production movable body 900 is decorated with a family crest. The effect movable body 900 can be moved up and down in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown). The drive control of the effect movable body 900 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500. In the state shown in FIG. 16A, the effect movable body 900 is located at the initial position. The initial position of the effect movable body 900 is a position where the substantially lower half of the effect movable body 900 overlaps the upper center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the pachinko machine 100 is viewed from the front side. The upper end of the moving range of the effect movable body 900 may be the initial position or may be above the initial position.

  FIG. 16A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 of a default display mode are displayed. In the present embodiment, the default display mode of the variation icon and the special figure 1 hold icon are both circular blue (indicated by white dot hatching on a black background). The default display mode is set so that the reliability is the lowest. Note that a special figure 1 hold icon indicating a hold whose special figure 1 prefetch result is “undecided” may be displayed in a default display mode. In this case, the reliability of the default display mode is not set.

  FIG. 16B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. In FIG. 16 (b) and after, the illustration is simplified more than the decorative design than FIG. 5 (c). A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ 5-6-3 "is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 16C shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation (hereinafter may be referred to as “variable icon erasing animation”) is started. In the present embodiment, the animation to erase the variation icon is started after the decorative symbol variation stop display (after the decorative symbol variation display ends). In FIGS. 16C to 16E, the left-pointing arrow illustrated to the left of the variation icon f1 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f1. In the variation icon erasing animation of this embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f1 gradually moves to the left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (slide-out manner). Is done.

  At the time shown in FIG. 16C, the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon”) is started in the variable icon display area 706. In this embodiment, the appearance animation of the pre-read notice icon is started after the start of the erasing animation of the variable icon. It should be noted that the start timing of the erasure animation of the change icon and the start timing of the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon may be the same, or the erasure animation of the change icon may be started after the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon starts. .

  The appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is an animation in which the prefetch notice icon displayed as the prefetch notice display based on the prefetch result information obtained by the special figure prefetch process shown in FIG. 8A appears in the image display area. The pre-reading notice display is a display in which the execution possibility and the kind of effect are determined by a predetermined lottery using the effect prefetching notice result information in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. The prefetch notice display can be displayed not only when the special figure variable game related to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice becomes a big hit, but also when the special figure variable game related to the hold is lost. In this example, the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon and the prefetch notice icon are displayed as a prefetch notice display for the second hold in FIG. At the beginning of the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon, the prefetching notice icon i has a white circular shape with a smaller display size than the change icon f1. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead notice icon i changes in form while gradually increasing from a white circle, and becomes a picture of the face of Yoshimune, the character character, as shown in FIG. In addition, the prefetch notice icon i may be displayed by the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon of the aspect (fade in) where the pattern of Yoshimune of a thin display color appears and the display color of the said pattern becomes dark. The appearance animation of the pre-read notice icon may be an aspect in which the display color of the icon to appear gradually becomes dark or an aspect in which the transparency of the icon to appear appears gradually lower. The appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends when the display of the prefetch notice icon is completed.

  Note that the prefetch notice icon may include a character string image or may include only a character string image. The prefetch notice icon of the character string image may have different jackpot reliability depending on the content and color of the character string. For example, the jackpot reliability of the prefetch notice icon including the “hot” character string image may be set higher than the jackpot reliability of the prefetch notice icon including the “chance” character string image. For example, the jackpot reliability of the prefetch notice icon including the red “chance” character string image may be set higher than the jackpot reliability of the prefetch notice icon including the blue “chance” character string image.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, a part of the prefetch notice icon i is displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon f1 so as to overlap a part of the fluctuation icon f1. Note that all of the prefetch notice icons i may be displayed so as to overlap the variation icon f1 so as to overlap a part of the variation icon f1. It is sufficient that at least a part of the prefetch notice icon i is displayed so as to overlap the variation icon f1 so as to overlap the variation icon f1. The start position of the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is the display start position of the prefetch notice icon i. The display start position of the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon that causes the prefetching notice icon to appear is a position where at least a part overlaps the fluctuation icon in the erasure animation of the fluctuation icon. Note that the change icon f1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the prefetch notice icon i.

  In the present embodiment, a prefetch notice icon appears as a prefetch notice display, but the appearing icon may be the notice icon as a notice display of the change (design change display being executed). The notice icon appears in the appearance animation of the notice icon in the same manner as the prefetch notice icon. Similar to the start position of the appearance animation of the pre-reading notice icon, the start position of the appearance animation of the notice icon is a position at least partially overlapping the change icon in the erased animation of the change icon. As described above, the notice icon in the appearance animation of the notice icon may be displayed so as to overlap the change icon in the erased animation of the change icon.

  FIG. 16D shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon has ended. The look-ahead notice icon i changes from a white circle to the face of Yoshimune's face, and the change of the display mode is completed. The appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends when the change in the display mode of the prefetch notice icon is finished. In addition, a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon f1 gradually moves in the direction of the leftward arrow is executed.

  FIG. 16E shows a state in which a pre-reading notice icon movement animation (hereinafter, referred to as “pre-reading notice icon movement animation” in some cases) is started. In FIGS. 16E and 16F, the right downward arrow shown to the right of the prefetch notice icon i indicates the moving direction of the prefetch notice icon i. The moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is an animation in which the prefetch notice icon i is gradually moved from the change icon display area 706 to the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800. Note that the moving animation of the prefetching notice icon displayed after the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon may be displayed as a prefetching notice display. In this example, the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display for the second hold in FIG. In addition, a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon f1 gradually moves in the direction of the leftward arrow is executed.

  FIG. 16F shows a state in which the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is being executed. The right third of the look-ahead notice icon i is displayed in the area overlapping the sub display device 800 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right second third portion is displayed in the sub display device 800. And the left third part of the prefetch notice icon i is visible. The sub display device 800 displays an image ib corresponding to a hidden portion of the prefetch notice icon i. The image ib is displayed at the left end portion of the image display area of the sub display device 800 so as to be viewed in a row with the prefetching notice icon i when viewed from the front side. The prefetching notice icon i and the image ib indicate the prefetching notice icon. Is displayed in its entirety. As described above, when an animation for moving an image from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 800 is executed, a display corresponding to a portion hidden by the sub display device 800 is displayed on the sub display device 800. There may be a case where the display of the portion hidden by the sub display device 800 is not displayed on the sub display device 800.

  When the moving animation of the pre-reading notice icon progresses, the pre-reading notice icon i is gradually hidden on the sub display device 800, and an image corresponding to the hidden portion is displayed on the sub display device 800. When the pre-reading notice icon i is moved to a position where the sub-display device 800 is entirely hidden, the pre-reading notice icon i is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208 and the pre-reading notice icon i is displayed on the sub-display device 800 instead.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16F, the erasure animation of the variation icon has ended, and the variation icon f1 has been erased from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the animation for deleting the variation icon is started during the stop display of the decorative symbol (during the stop display of the variation display), and is ended during the stop display. The display period of the fluctuation icon erasing animation is a period from the start of erasure of the fluctuation icon until the fluctuation icon is erased from the decorative design display device 208.

  FIG. 16G shows a state in which the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon has been completed. A prefetch notice icon i is displayed at the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800. When the prefetch notice icon i has been moved to the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800, the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon ends.

  FIG. 16 (h) shows a state in which a movement animation between hold and change icons (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “movement animation between hold and change icons”) and a movement animation of hold icons are started. Yes. The moving animation between the holding / changing icons and the moving animation of the holding icons are started prior to the start of the special figure changing game. Note that the moving animation between the holding / changing icons and the moving animation of the holding icons may be started simultaneously with the start of the special figure changing game. Note that the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the move animation of the hold icons may be started simultaneously with the start of the decorative pattern change display.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon h1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area 706. . In FIGS. 16H and 16I, the left-pointing arrow illustrated to the left of the variation icon f2 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f2. In this embodiment, simultaneously with the start of the moving animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon h1 becomes the change icon f2. At the time shown in FIG. 16 (h), the fluctuation icon f2 is moving toward the outside of the image display area of the sub display device 800, and the left third of the fluctuation icon f2 is not displayed. An image f2b corresponding to the non-displayed portion is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The image f2b is displayed so that it can be viewed in a row with the variation icon f2 when viewed from the front side, and the variation icon f2 and the image f2b are viewed as if the entire variation icon is displayed.

  With the progress of the moving animation between the hold / change icons, the change icon f2 gradually moves to the left toward the outside of the display area of the sub display device 800, and the change icon f2 is gradually hidden from the left to the right. Become. An image corresponding to the non-displayed portion is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the variation icon f2 is completely erased from the sub display device 800, the variation icon f2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 gradually moves to the first area and is displayed in the third area. The 1 hold icon h3 gradually moves to the second area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area. 16 (h) and (i), the left-pointing arrows shown above the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4 indicate the moving directions of the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4, respectively. A white circular area whose outline is defined by a virtual broken line illustrated in each of the first to fourth areas 802 indicates the display position of the special figure 1 holding icon in each area when the moving animation of the holding icon is not executed. Show.

  In this embodiment, the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon are started at the same time. Note that either the moving animation between the hold / change icons or the moving animation of the hold icon may be started first.

  FIG. 16 (i) shows a decorative symbol variation display, a fourth symbol variation display, and a fifth symbol variation display as the special figure 1 display game 212 is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Indicates a state where is started. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started simultaneously. The variation display of the 4th symbol and the variation display of the 5th symbol may be started simultaneously, and then the variation display of the decorative symbol may be started. First, the variation display of the 5th symbol is started, and then The variation display of the four symbols may be started, and finally the variation display of the decorative symbols may be started.

  FIG. 16J shows a state where the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon have been completed. Instead of the sub display device 800, a variation icon f2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation icon f2 has been moved to the fluctuation icon display area 706. The special figure 1 hold icon h2 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the first area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h3 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the second area. Then, the special figure 1 hold icon h4 has completed the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the third area. The movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons ends when the movement of the change icon to the change icon display area 706 is completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon ends when all the hold icons have been moved to the respective areas.

  FIG. 16 (k) shows a state in which a prefetch notice display is displayed during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. A balloon image 710 including a character string “Expect the next change!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon image 710 is an example of a prefetch notice icon displayed as a prefetch notice display. The balloon image 710 is a pre-reading notice display that suggests that the first special figure 1 has a high expectation of holding. The pre-reading notice display may include a character string image that suggests which of the high-expected special-figure variable games such as “next” and “within hold”. The balloon image 710 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed overlapping the balloon image 710. Note that the jackpot reliability may be set for each type of character string included in the balloon image. For example, a balloon image that includes the character string “Expect the next change” will be displayed only when it reaches a reach that is higher than the normal reach in the symbol change display subject to notice, and a balloon that contains the character string “Large behaviour” The image is displayed only when it evolves to reach beyond reach in the symbol variation display subject to notice, and the balloon image containing the text “Is it a chance?” Is when the symbol variation display subject to notice is a big hit Appears only in

  FIG. 16 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “7-1-1” is stopped and displayed.

  The balloon image 710 is deleted before the end of the special figure 1 variable game. Note that the prefetch notice icon i may be deleted together with the balloon image 710.

  FIG. 16 (m) shows a state where the animation for erasing the variable icon has started. Due to the start of the fluctuation icon erasing animation, the fluctuation icon f2 starts to move gradually to the left.

  FIG. 16 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the hold / fluctuation icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are started. Variation display and variation display of the fifth symbol are started. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the change icon f3 and moves to the change icon display area 706. . At the time shown in FIG. 16 (n), the fluctuation icon f2 is moving outside the image display area of the sub display device 800, and the left third of the fluctuation icon f3 is not displayed. An image f3b corresponding to the non-displayed portion is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 gradually moves to the first area and is displayed in the third area. The 1 hold icon h4 gradually moves to the second area.

  FIG. 16 (o) shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon are finished. Instead of the sub display device 800, a variation icon f3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation icon f3 has been moved to the fluctuation icon display area 706. The special figure 1 hold icon h3 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the first area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the second area. doing.

  FIG. 16 (p) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, the “decoration 7” is displayed in a manner that swings up and down (hereinafter referred to as “swing fluctuation display”). The reach effect is started with the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c. When the reach effect develops into a super reach effect or the like, the prefetch notice icon i may be deleted.

  A speaker 120 is schematically shown in the lower right part of FIG. At the start of the reach effect, the “reach” sound may be output from the speaker 120 to notify the start of the reach effect. Note that a display for notifying that the reach effect has started may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 800.

  FIG. 16 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the special jackpot indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a special jackpot is stopped and displayed. . A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination “7-7−” that notifies the big symbol in the 5th symbol display area 704 is displayed. 7 "is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 16 (r) shows a state where the big hit notification effect is executed. A horizontally elongated rectangular hollow image is displayed at the approximate center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character string image of “big hit!” Is displayed in the white drawn image, indicating that the big hit has been won. Has been. The outline image is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Note that the change icon, the prefetch notice icon, and the hold icon may be deleted at the start of the big hit notification effect. Note that either the various icons or the various decorative symbols may be displayed with priority.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 and a sub display device 800 as display means capable of displaying a notice display. The notice display includes a notice display of the change and a look-ahead notice display. The display means can display a plurality of types of icons and a plurality of types of animations. One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon, and one icon of the plurality of types of icons is a notification icon as the notification display (the notification icon, the pre-reading notification icon). One of the plurality of types of animations can display a variation icon erase animation including a variation icon erase scene. The first icon is a variation icon in the variation icon erasing animation, and the notice icon may at least partially overlap the first icon. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the fluctuation icon f1 can be noticed until the fluctuation icon f1 is deleted.

  In addition, one icon of the plurality of types of icons is the second icon, and one animation of the plurality of types of animations is the animation of the notice icon including the appearance scene of the notice icon (the notice icon Appearance animation, appearance animation of prefetch notice icon). The second icon is a notice icon in the appearance animation of the notice icon. The appearance animation of the notice icon may start to be displayed while the erased animation of the change icon is displayed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, attention may be paid to the variation icon f1 until the variation icon f1 is deleted.

  Note that when the pre-reading notice icon i or the notice icon of the change is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is displayed in the symbol change display of the notice object of these icons in a stop display rather than when these icons are not displayed. Easy to be. There are a plurality of types of the pre-reading notice icon i and the notice icon of the change, and the success expectation degree or the big hit reliability degree of the pending change display may be indicated depending on the type of icon displayed. For example, the icon of the display pattern of the ghost character design has a success expectation level and a jackpot reliability set for the pending change display for each color, and the success expectation level and the jackpot confidence for the pending change display in the order of blue, green and red. It is set to be high. For example, the icon of Yoshimune's character design display mode is set with the expected success and jackpot reliability for the display of changes and poses for each Yoshimune's expression and pose. The success expectation and the big hit reliability of the hold change display are set to be higher than the icon of the picture. For example, the icon of the display pattern of the character pattern of Kunoichi is displayed only when the icon changes to the super reach in the symbol variation display subject to the notice of the icon. For example, the icon of the display pattern of the princess character pattern is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the icon of the display pattern of the ghost or Yoshimune Yakunoichi character pattern. For example, a premier notice icon is displayed only when the symbol change display subject to notice of the icon is a big hit.

(Example 2)
FIGS. 17-21 has shown the example of an effect in Example 2 of this Embodiment. 17 (a) to (r) and FIGS. 18 (a) to (l) show the effect state at each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 17A to 17R and FIGS. 18A to 18L are the same as the configurations shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment, and the same operations and effects. Therefore, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 17A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 of a default display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 17B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ 5-6-3 "is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 17C shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variation icon has started. In the present embodiment, the animation to erase the variation icon is started after the variation stop display of the decorative symbol (after the variation display is completed). In FIGS. 17C to 17F, the left-pointing arrow illustrated to the left of the variation icon f1 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f1. In the variation icon erasing animation of the present embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that it gradually moves to the left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 17D shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is started. In this example, the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon and the prefetch notice icon are displayed as a prefetch notice display for the second hold in FIG. 1 (hold indicated by the special figure 1 hold icon h2). At the beginning of the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon, the prefetching notice icon j has a white circular shape with a smaller display size than the change icon f1. In this embodiment, the look-ahead notice icon j changes in form while gradually increasing from a white circle, and becomes a picture of the face of Yoshimune of the character taktaku as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17D, a part of the prefetch notice icon j is displayed so as to overlap with the fluctuation icon f1 so as to overlap a part of the fluctuation icon f1. Note that all of the prefetch notice icons j may be displayed so as to overlap the variation icon f1 so as to overlap a part of the variation icon f1. It is sufficient that at least a part of the prefetch notice icon j is displayed so as to overlap the variation icon f1 so as to overlap the variation icon f1. The start position of the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is the display start position of the prefetch notice icon j. The display start position of the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon that causes the prefetching notice icon to appear is a position at least partially overlapping the erasure animation of the changing icon that deletes the changing icon.

  FIG. 17E shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon has been completed. The look-ahead notice icon j changes from a white circle to the face of Yoshimune's face, and the change of the display mode is completed. The appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends when the change in the display mode of the prefetch notice icon is finished. A plurality of types of display forms of the prefetch notice icon j may be provided in addition to the face pattern of Yoshimune. In addition, a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon f1 gradually moves in the direction of the leftward arrow is executed.

  FIG. 17F shows a state in which the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is started. In FIGS. 17 (f) and 17 (g), an arrow pointing downward to the right of the prefetch notice icon j indicates the moving direction of the prefetch notice icon j. The moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is an animation in which the prefetch notice icon j is gradually moved from the change icon display area 706 to the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800. Note that the moving animation of the prefetching notice icon displayed after the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon may be displayed as a prefetching notice display. In this example, the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display for the second hold in FIG. In addition, a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon f1 gradually moves in the direction of the leftward arrow is executed.

  FIG. 17G shows a state in which the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is being executed. The right third of the pre-reading notice icon j is displayed in an area overlapping the sub display device 800 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right second third portion is displayed in the sub display device 800. And the left third part of the prefetch notice icon j is visible. The sub display device 800 displays an image jb corresponding to a hidden portion of the prefetch notice icon j. The image jb is displayed so as to be viewed in a row with the prefetching notice icon i when viewed from the front side, and the prefetching notice icon j and the image jb are viewed as if the entire prefetching notice icon is displayed. . As described above, when an animation for moving an image from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 800 is executed, a display corresponding to a portion hidden by the sub display device 800 is displayed on the sub display device 800.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17G, the variation icon erasing animation has been completed, and the variation icon f1 has been erased from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 17 (h) shows a state where the moving animation of the pre-read notice icon has been completed. A prefetch notice icon j is displayed at the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800. When the prefetch notice icon j has been moved to the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800, the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon ends.

  FIG. 17 (i) shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon are started. The moving animation between the holding / changing icons and the moving animation of the holding icons are started prior to the start of the special figure changing game.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon h1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area 706. . In FIGS. 17I and 17J, the left-pointing arrow illustrated to the left of the variation icon f2 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f2. At the time shown in FIG. 17 (i), the fluctuation icon f2 is moving toward the outside of the image display area of the sub display device 800, and the left third of the fluctuation icon f2 is not displayed. An image f2b corresponding to the non-displayed portion is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The image f2b is displayed so that it can be viewed in a row with the variation icon f2 when viewed from the front side, and the variation icon f2 and the image f2b are viewed as if the entire variation icon is displayed.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 gradually moves to the first area and is displayed in the third area. The 1 hold icon h3 gradually moves to the second area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area. In FIGS. 17 (i) and (j), the left-pointing arrows shown above the special figure 1 holding icons h2 to h4 indicate the moving directions of the special figure 1 holding icons h2 to h4, respectively. A white circular area whose outline is defined by a virtual broken line illustrated in each of the first to fourth areas 802 indicates the display position of the special figure 1 holding icon in each area when the moving animation of the holding icon is not executed. Show.

  FIG. 17 (j) shows a variation display of a decorative symbol, a variation display of a fourth symbol, and a variation display of a fifth symbol as the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts. Indicates a state where is started. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started simultaneously.

  FIG. 17 (k) shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon are finished. Instead of the sub display device 800, a variation icon f2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation icon f2 has been moved to the fluctuation icon display area 706. The special figure 1 hold icon h2 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the first area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h3 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the second area. Then, the special figure 1 hold icon h4 has completed the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the third area. The movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons ends when the movement of the change icon to the change icon display area 706 is completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon ends when all the hold icons have been moved to the respective areas.

  FIG. 17 (l) shows a state in which an animation in which the prefetch notice icon j moves to the upper side of the special figure 1 hold icon h2 is executed. In FIG. 17 (l), a left-pointing arrow shown on the right side of the prefetch notice icon j indicates the moving direction of the prefetch notice icon j. The animation in which the prefetch notice icon j moves to the upper side of the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display is an animation that suggests the start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 17 (m) shows a state in which an animation in which the prefetch notice icon j moves downward is executed. The prefetch notice icon j is displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the hold icon h2 that is the target of the hold change display. When at least a part of the prefetch notice icon j overlaps with the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display, the hold change display is started for the hold icon. In the hold change display, the hold icon displayed in the first display mode (for example, the default display mode) is changed to a second display mode (for example, the display mode of the pre-reading notice) different from the first display mode. It is a display. In the present embodiment, the prefetch notice icon j is an icon that suggests the start of the hold change display, and is displayed even after the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends.

  FIG. 17 (n) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. The effect image k is displayed overlapping the prefetching notice icon j and the special figure 1 hold icon h2, and the prefetching notice icon j and the hold icon h2 as a whole are not visible. Note that the effect image k may be an image displayed in place of the prefetch notice icon j, and the prefetch notice icon j may be deleted when the effect image k is displayed. Further, the effect image k may be displayed so as to overlap with a part of the special figure 1 hold icon h3 different from the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display.

  In the hold change display, the effect image k is gradually erased in such a manner that the display size is gradually reduced, and the hold icon h2 that has changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice is gradually visible. The prefetch notice icon j is deleted before the deletion of the effect image k is started.

  FIG. 17 (o) shows a state in which the hold change display is finished. The effect image k is completely erased, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon h2 is visible. The display form of the special figure 1 hold icon h2 is a pattern of the character Yoshimune. The display mode of the picture of Yoshimune's character is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, and is set with higher reliability than the default display mode. As in this example, when the prefetch notice icon j that suggests the start of the hold change display is a picture of Yoshimune's face, the display mode of the hold icon h2 that is the target of the hold change display is the Yoshimune after the hold change display. It becomes the pattern. Even if the look-ahead notice icon j suggesting the start of the hold change display is a picture of Yoshimune's face, the display mode of the hold icon h2 that is the object of the hold change display is the picture of Yoshimune after the hold change display. Even if the prefetch notice icon j suggesting the start of the hold change display is a display form (for example, a heart pattern) other than the face pattern of Yoshimune, the hold change display is possible. The display mode of the hold icon h <b> 2 that is the target of the display may be a pattern of Yoshimune after the hold change display. When the display mode of the prefetch notice icon j is other than the Yoshimune face pattern, the display mode of the hold icon h2 that is the target of the hold change display is a plurality of types of patterns including the Yoshimune pattern after the hold change display. It may be determined by a predetermined lottery so as to be one display mode.

  FIG. 17 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “1-1-7” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 17 (q) shows a state in which the animation for erasing the variable icon has started. The variation icon f2 is erased in such a manner that it gradually moves to the left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 17 (r) shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons has been completed. The special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the fluctuation icon f3, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f3 to the fluctuation icon display area 706 has been completed. The moving animation between icons has ended. The fluctuation icon f3 is displayed in a size larger than the hold icon h2 before becoming the fluctuation icon. As described above, when the hold icon whose display mode has changed due to the hold change display is displayed as the change icon on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display size is larger than that displayed on the sub display device 800. May be displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 17 (r), a moving animation of the hold icon is displayed. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 gradually moves to the first area and is displayed in the third area. The 1 hold icon h4 gradually moves to the second area. As in this example, the moving animation between the hold and change icons may end before the moving animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 18 (a) following FIG. 17 (r) shows a variation display of the decorative symbol, a variation display of the fourth symbol, as the special FIG. And the state which the change display of the 5th symbol was started is shown. The moving animation of the hold icon is in progress.

  FIG. 18B shows a state where the moving animation of the hold icon has been completed. The special figure 1 hold icon h3 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the first area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the second area. doing.

  FIG. 18C shows a state in which the reach effect is started. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner. The reach effect is started with the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c. It should be noted that the expectation level of the reach effect that starts when the “decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner is set to be higher than the expectation level that will be described later with reference to FIG. Has been.

  FIG. 18D shows a state where the start notification effect of the reach effect is executed. A speaker 120 is schematically shown in the lower right part of FIG. A “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 as the start notification effect of the reach effect. Note that the start notification effect of the reach effect may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 800.

  FIG. 18E shows a state where an effect suggesting that the reach effect is developed is executed. The development suggestion image 712 including the character string image of “development!” Is displayed in the center of the horizontally long rectangular white image in the approximate center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is developed. An effect suggesting that is being executed. The development suggestion image 712 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed overlapping the developed image 712.

  FIG. 18F shows a state in which the reach effect has been developed into a super reach effect. Of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a darkening effect is performed in which the area excluding the periphery of the fourth symbol display areas 700 and 702 is displayed in black. The start of the dark turn production will be the start of the super reach production. During the Super Reach production, the decorative symbol change display is not displayed. Further, during the darkening effect and during the cut-in effect described later with reference to FIG. 18 (g), the variation display of the fifth symbol is not displayed. Further, the fourth symbol display areas 700 and 702 are continuously displayed even during the super reach production. As shown in this example, in a special figure variable game with a high expectation level of jackpot, it may be developed into a super reach production. Even if it is a big hit, it does not have to develop into a super reach production.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (f), when the super reach effect is started, the sub display device 800 moves downward. In FIG. 18F, downward arrows illustrated on the left and right of the sub display device 800 indicate the moving direction of the sub display device 800. As a result, the area hidden by the sub display device 800 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is narrowed, and the area that can be used for the super reach effect in the image display area can be widened.

  Further, after the start of a specific effect such as a super reach effect, the change icon, the prefetch notice icon, the hold icon, the button image 708, and the like may be deleted. In this example, the change icon f3 and the button image 708 are deleted at the start of the super reach production. The change icon f3 and the button image 708 are not displayed during execution of the super reach effect. The button image 708 may be displayed during execution of the super reach effect.

  FIG. 18G shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed during the super reach effect. A substantially entire surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes an effect display area 208d, and a cut-in image including a character image of Yoshimune and a character string image of “game is!” Is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display area 208d. Executed. The fourth symbol display areas 700 and 702 are displayed so as to overlap the cut-in image, and the whole is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 18G, the sub-display device 800 displays a character image of “Swordsman” on a white background image. The background image of the castle town and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 are displayed. And the special figure 1 hold icon is deleted. The character string image of “swordsman” is an image suggesting that a confrontation effect with a swordsman is executed in the super reach effect, and is a display corresponding to the super reach effect in this example. During the super reach production, characters corresponding to the super reach production developed in the sub display device 800 may be displayed. Note that the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 and the special figure 1 hold icon may be displayed during the super reach production. In addition, after the cut-in effect ends, the display of the variation display of the fifth symbol is resumed.

  FIG. 18 (h) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is finished and the confrontation effect is started during the super reach effect. A character image of Yoshimune (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “Yoshimune”) is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character image of a swordsman (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune”) is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d. May be referred to as “swordsman”). In the confrontation production, the production including the animation of the scene where Yoshimune and Kengo confront each other is executed.

  FIG. 18I shows a state in which the result notification effect is executed after the scene where Yoshimune and the swordsman confront each other is displayed during the confrontation effect. In the effect display area 208d, the winning Yoshimune is displayed on the right side, and on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a character image of “win” and a defeated swordsman are displayed. A character image of “Victory” is displayed, and it is informed that Yoshimune has won the confrontation. In the confrontation effect of this example, if the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, Yoshimune wins, and if the success / failure determination result is out of place, Yoshimune loses.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 18 (h2), after the start of the confrontation effect, after the animation of the scene where Yoshimune and Kengo confront each other is displayed, Yoshimune is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d. A swordsman is displayed on the left side in the area 208d, and then, as shown in FIG. 18 (i2), a red button image 708 (indicated by right-up hatching in the figure) is displayed at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. A character string image of “Press!” Is displayed above. The red button image 708 and the character string image of “Press!” Are displays that prompt the player to press the chance button 136. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 has started at the time shown in FIG. 18 (i2). When the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period, the result notification effect shown in FIG. Executed. As described above, before the result notification effect is executed, a win / loss judgment effect that performs a display prompting the user to press the chance button 136 may be executed. The symbol variation display in which the winning / losing judge effect is executed may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the winning / losing judge effect is not executed. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the red button image 708 and the character string image of “Press!” Are deleted, and then the effect shown in FIG. Thus, the effect shown in FIG. 18J may be executed.

  FIG. 18J shows a state in which the super reach effect has been completed. In this example, the “win” character string image displayed in the effect display area 208d and the confrontation effect result notification effect are terminated when the swordsman is erased, and the super reach effect ends when the result notification effect ends. To do. After completion of the super reach effect, the display of the decorative symbols is resumed. In FIG. 18J, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 18 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the special jackpot indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a special jackpot is stopped and displayed. . A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination “7-7−” that notifies the big symbol in the 5th symbol display area 704 is displayed. 7 "is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 18L shows a state in which the sub display device 800 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In FIG. 18L, the upward arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 800 indicate the moving direction of the sub display device 800. By returning the initial position of the sub display device 800, the right foot portion of Yoshimune displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the sub display device 800. On the sub display device 800, an image corresponding to the right foot portion of Yoshimune is displayed so as to continue the Yoshimune displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the decoration design display device 208 and the sub display device 800 together display the entire Yoshimune. Is displayed. In this way, when the sub display device 800 moves and the background, icons, and part of the character image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are hidden by the sub display device 800, the hidden portion is displayed as a sub display device. 800 may be displayed. In this case, only the background may be displayed on the sub display device 800, or only a specific icon or a specific character image may be displayed.

  When the sub display device 800 or the movable body 900 is moved from the initial position for the effect, the sub display device 800 or the movable body 900 is returned to the initial position when the special figure variation game is finished. When the sub display device 800 or the movable body 900 is moved as the prefetching notice effect, the sub display device 800 or the movable body 900 is returned to the initial position when the special-figure variable game subject to the prefetching notice is finished.

  In the present embodiment, a prefetch notice icon appears overlapping with the erased variation icon, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon is changed by the prefetch notice icon. In this way, another icon appears overlapping the erased icon, and the display mode of another icon is changed by the another icon. A combination of these icons can be arbitrarily set. For example, these icons include a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, an operation suggestion display such as a button image 708, a prefetch notice icon, a prefetch notice display, a variation icon, a hold icon, and the like. These displays may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or on the sub display device 800.

The hold change display may be started for the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display even when the prefetch notice icon j is not displayed.
The prefetch notice icon is an icon that passes through the first position (the position of the prefetch notice icon j in FIG. 17H) when approaching the hold icon that is the object of the hold change display.
When the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon does not start, the prefetching notice icon and the variation icon may not overlap.
The appearance animation of the pre-read notice icon may be an animation that is not displayed during the electric support.
An appearance animation of a pre-reading notice icon or an animation displayed only during Den Sapo may be used.
The change icon may be deleted without executing the change icon deletion animation.
When the fluctuation icon is deleted without executing the fluctuation icon erasing animation, the pre-reading notice icon and the fluctuation icon do not overlap.
There is a case where the appearance animation of the pre-reading notice icon is started only when the erasing animation of the variable icon is started and only when the hold icon is displayed.
It should be noted that the erasure animation of the variation icon may be an animation that is not displayed during the variation display of the decoration symbol and is displayed only during the stop display of the decoration symbol.

  Note that when the pre-reading notice icon i or the notice icon of the change is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is displayed in the symbol change display of the notice object of these icons in a stop display rather than when these icons are not displayed. Easy to be. There are a plurality of types of the pre-reading notice icon i and the notice icon of the change, and the success expectation degree or the big hit reliability degree of the pending change display may be indicated depending on the type of icon displayed. For example, the icon of the display form of the character pattern of Kunoichi is displayed only when the hold change display is successful in which the display form of the hold icon actually changes. For example, the icon of the display pattern of the princess character design has a higher jackpot reliability than the icon of the display format of the Kunoichi character design, and is displayed only when the hold change display succeeds in which the display mode of the hold icon actually changes. Is done.

  Note that when the hold change display shown in FIGS. 17 (m) to (o) is executed, the big hit symbol form is displayed in a stopped state in the pre-reading notice target symbol change display, compared to the case where the hold change display is not executed. Easy to be. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon after the hold change display may be provided with a display pattern of Yoshimune's character design, a display mode of Kunoichi's character design, a display mode of the princess's character design, and a premier display mode. As for the display mode of the hold icon after the hold change display, the jackpot reliability increases in the order of the display pattern of the character pattern of Yoshimune, the display mode of the character pattern of Kunoichi, the display mode of the princess character pattern, and the display mode of the premier. It may be set.

  Next, Modification Example 1 of the effect example in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (k) show the production state at each point in time in this order. The configurations shown in FIGS. 19A to 19K are the same as those shown in FIG. 18A of the present embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 19A shows a state continued from FIG. In FIG. 19A, reach production is started. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 4” is displayed in a swinging manner. The reach effect is started with the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c.

  FIG. 19B shows a state where the start notification effect of the reach effect is executed. A speaker 120 is schematically shown in the lower right part of FIG. As the start notification effect of the reach effect, the “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120, and “reach!” Is displayed in the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and in the center of the horizontally elongated rectangular image. The reach effect start image 714 including the character string image is displayed, and the start notification effect of the reach effect is executed. The reach effect image 714 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative symbol. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may overlap the reach effect image 714 and be displayed.

  FIG. 19C shows a state where an effect suggesting that the reach effect is developed is executed. The development suggestion image 712 is displayed substantially at the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect suggesting that the reach effect is developed is executed. The development suggestion image 712 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 19D shows a state in which the reach effect has been developed into a super reach effect. Of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a darkening effect is performed in which the area excluding the periphery of the fourth symbol display areas 700 and 702 is displayed in black. The start of the dark turn production will be the start of the super reach production. During the Super Reach production, the decorative symbol change display is not displayed. Further, during the darkening effect and during the cut-in effect described later with reference to FIG. 19 (e), the variable display of the fifth symbol is not displayed. Further, the fourth symbol display areas 700 and 702 are continuously displayed even during the super reach production.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (d), when the super reach effect is started, the sub display device 800 moves downward. In FIG. 19D, downward arrows illustrated on the left and right of the sub display device 800 indicate the moving direction of the sub display device 800. As a result, the area hidden by the sub display device 800 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is narrowed, and the area that can be used for the super reach effect in the image display area can be widened.

  Further, after the start of a specific effect such as a super reach effect, the change icon, the prefetch notice icon, the hold icon, the button image 708, and the like may be deleted. In this example, the change icon f3 and the button image 708 are deleted at the start of the super reach production. The change icon f3 and the button image 708 are not displayed during execution of the super reach effect.

  FIG. 19E shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed during the super reach effect. Nearly the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect display area 208d, and a cut-in image including a character image of Yoshimune and a character string image of “Katsuya!” Is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display area 208d. Cut-in effect is executed. The fourth symbol display areas 700 and 702 are displayed so as to overlap the cut-in image, and the whole is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (e), the sub-display device 800 displays a character string image of “Swordsman” on a white background image, a castle town background image, and a special figure 1 hold icon display area 802. And the special figure 1 hold icon is deleted. The character string image of “swordsman” is an image suggesting that a confrontation effect with a swordsman is executed in the super reach effect, and is a display corresponding to the super reach effect in this example. In addition, after the cut-in effect ends, the display of the variation display of the fifth symbol is resumed.

  FIG. 19F shows a state in which the cut-in effect is finished and the confrontation effect is started during the super reach effect. Yoshimune is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the swordsman is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 19G shows a state in which the result notification effect is executed after the scene where Yoshimune and the swordsman confront each other is displayed during the confrontation effect. The defeated Yoshimune is displayed on the right side in the effect display area 208d, a character image of “losing” is displayed above it, and the winning swordsman is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d. A character string image of “defeat” is displayed at 800 to notify that Yoshimune was defeated. In the confrontation effect of this example, if the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, Yoshimune wins, and if the success / failure determination result is out of place, Yoshimune loses. Also in this example, before the result notification effect is executed, a winning / losing judge effect that performs a display prompting the user to press the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. 18 (h2) and (i2) may be executed.

  FIG. 19 (h) shows a state in which the super reach effect has been completed. In this example, when the character image of Yoshimune, Kengo, and “Lose” displayed in the effect display area 208d is deleted, the result effect of the confrontation effect ends, and the result of the result notification effect ends. Ends. After completion of the super reach effect, the display of the decorative symbols is resumed. In FIG. 19H, “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 19 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ 4-5-4 "is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 19 (j) shows a state in which the sub display device 800 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In FIG. 19J, the upward arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 800 indicate the moving direction of the sub display device 800.

  FIG. 19 (k) shows a state in which the display of the special figure 1 hold icon is resumed on the sub display device 800. The sub display device 800 displays the background image of the castle town, the special figure 1 hold icon h3 is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 is displayed in the second area. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (k), the display of the fluctuation icon f3 is not resumed. As described above, the display of the variation icon which is the notice mode (in this example, the picture of Yoshimune) is not resumed even after the super reach effect ends, and the variation icon erasure animation may not be executed after the variation ends.

  Next, modification 2 of the effect example in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a) to (e) and (g) to (l) show the effect state at each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E and FIGS. 20G to 20L are the same as those shown in FIG. 18A of the present embodiment, and exhibit the same operations and effects. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to them and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 20 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 18 (g). In FIG. 20A, the confrontation effect is started during the super reach effect. Yoshimune is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the swordsman is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 20B shows a state in which a scene where Yoshimune and swordsman confront each other during the confrontation effect is displayed. In a scene in which Yoshimune and Kengo confront each other, Yoshimune moves to the right of the effect display area 208d, and Kengo moves to the left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 20 (c) shows a state in which the winning / losing judgment effect is started. When the winning / losing judge production of this example is started, a red button image 708 is displayed in the approximate center of the production display area 208d, and a gauge image (hereinafter referred to as “gauge image”) indicating the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is displayed below the red button image 708. 716 is displayed, and a character string image of “Press!” Is displayed on the sub display device 800, and the player is prompted to press the chance button 136. The character string image of “Press!” May be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed only on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 800. The gauge image 716 displays the remaining time of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the length of the red portion (in the figure, the hatching that is upward to the right). The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time when the button image 708 and the gauge image 716 are started to be displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be started before the display of the button image 708 and the gauge image 716 is started, or may be started after the display of the button image 708 and the gauge image 716 is started. . Part of the button image 708 and the gauge image 716 may be displayed on the sub display device 800.

  FIG. 20D shows a state during the operation effective period. The length of the red portion of the gauge image 716 is shortened, indicating that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image 716, the red portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period elapses.

  In the gauge image 716 of this example, a character string image of “Chance!” Is displayed as a character string image indicating the expected degree of the special figure variation game. The character string image “chance!” Becomes gradually visible from the right side as the red portion of the gauge image 716 becomes shorter. At the time shown in FIG. 20D, the right half of “su” and the entire “!” Of the character string image are visible. When Yoshimune wins a confrontation effect, a character string image is likely to be displayed in the gauge image 716. In other words, when a character string image is displayed in the gauge image 716, the expectation of big hit is high.

  FIG. 20E shows a state during the operation valid period. The length of the red portion of the gauge image 716 is further shortened, indicating that the remaining time of the button reception period is about one third. In the gauge image 716, the red portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period elapses. At the time shown in FIG. 20E, the right half of “Chi” and the entire “Chan!” Of the character string image “Chance!” Are visible. The image displayed in the gauge image 716 may be a character string image other than “chance!”, A moving image, or only a color indicating the big hit reliability (expectation). The image which becomes may be sufficient.

  FIG. 20F schematically shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136. The left side of FIG. 20F shows a state immediately before the player presses the chance button 136 with the index finger of the left hand. The right side of FIG. 20F shows a state immediately after the player presses the chance button 136 with the index finger of the left hand. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once by the player during the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 20G shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation valid period. In response to the chance button 136 being pressed, the Yoshimune, the swordsman, the button image 708 and the gauge image 716 are deleted. Further, in response to pressing of the chance button 136, a notification effect as a result of the confrontation effect is executed. In this example, Yoshimune wins the confrontation production. In this example, as a result notification effect, the effect movable body 900 moves downward to the approximate center in front of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect image 718 is displayed in the effect display region 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the sub-display device 800 displays a character string image of “win”. In FIG. 20G, the downward arrows illustrated on the left and right of the effect movable body 900 indicate the moving direction of the effect movable body 900. It should be noted that the sub display device 800 may move in response to the chance button 136 being pressed during the operation valid period.

  A part of the lower side of the effect image 718 is displayed in an area overlapping with the sub display device 800 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part is hidden by the sub display device 800. The sub display device 800 displays effect images 718a and 718 corresponding to the part. When viewed from the front, the effect images 718a and 718b are displayed at the upper end of the image display area of the sub display device 800 so that the effect images 718 and the effect image 718 can be visually recognized, and the effect images 718 and 718a and 718b Thus, the entire effect image is visually recognized.

  FIG. 20H shows a state in which the effect movable body 900 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In FIG. 20H, the upward arrows illustrated on the left and right of the effect movable body 900 indicate the moving direction of the effect movable body 900.

  FIG. 20I shows a state in which the effect image 718 and the effect images 718a and 718b are deleted, and Yoshimune and Kengo are redisplayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The winning Yoshimune is displayed on the right side in the effect display area 208d, the character image of “win” and the defeated swordsman are displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and Yoshimune won the confrontation. Is informed.

  FIG. 20 (j) shows a state where the super reach production has ended. In this example, the “win” character string image displayed in the effect display area 208d and the confrontation effect result notification effect are terminated when the swordsman is erased, and the super reach effect ends when the result notification effect ends. To do. After completion of the super reach effect, the display of the decorative symbols is resumed. In FIG. 20J, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 20 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the special jackpot indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a special jackpot is stopped and displayed. . A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination “7-7−” that notifies the big symbol in the 5th symbol display area 704 is displayed. 7 "is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 20 (l) shows a state in which the sub display device 800 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In FIG. 20L, upward arrows illustrated on the left and right of the sub display device 800 indicate the moving direction of the sub display device 800. By returning the initial position of the sub display device 800, the right foot portion of Yoshimune displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the sub display device 800. On the sub display device 800, an image corresponding to the right foot portion of Yoshimune is displayed so as to continue the Yoshimune displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the decoration design display device 208 and the sub display device 800 together display the entire Yoshimune. Is displayed.

  In this way, an effect that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 may be executed during the super reach effect. In this example, a button image 708, a gauge image 716, and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed as effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136. These images are deleted at the end of the operation effective period when the chassis button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the result notification effect shown in FIGS. 20 (g) to 20 (i) may not be executed, and the result notification effect is shown. May be executed.

  Immediately before the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, a button introduction animation (IN animation) may be displayed as an animation suggesting that the operation effective period starts. FIG. 20B to 20C show a state where the button introduction animation is being executed. The button introduction animation is executed between FIG. 20B and FIG. In the button introduction animation, the button image 708 is gradually displayed. For example, as the button introduction animation, an animation in which the transmittance of the button image 708 gradually changes from 100% to 0% may be displayed, or two button images having a transmittance of 50% are displayed in the effect display area 208d. An animation that appears from the left end portion and the right end portion, the two button images gradually move to the center of the effect display area 208d, and the two button images overlap to change to the button image 708 may be displayed. When the button introduction animation is executed, there may be a fake (gase) effect pattern in which the button image 708 shown in FIG. 20C is not displayed.

  Next, Modification 3 of the effect example in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 21A to 21D show the production state at each point in time in this order. The configurations shown in FIGS. 21A to 21D are the same as those shown in FIG. 17A of the present embodiment, and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 21A shows a state continued from FIG. The prefetch notice icon j displayed on the upper side of the special figure 1 hold icon h2 in the image display area of the sub display device 800 at the time of FIG. 17 (l) is the upper center of the image display area in FIG. Has moved to. In FIG. 21A, an arrow pointing upward on the left side of the prefetch notice icon j indicates the moving direction of the prefetch notice icon. The prefetch notice icon j has returned to the display position at the end of the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon shown in FIG.

  FIG. 21B shows a state in which an erase animation for the prefetch notice icon is being executed. In this example, the pre-reading notice icon erasing animation is executed in which the prefetching notice icon j is erased in such a manner that the transmittance gradually increases and contracts in a circular shape. In this example, even if the prefetch notice icon j is displayed, the hold change display that changes the display mode of the hold icon is not displayed. In this case, the prefetch notice icon j moves to the upper side of the hold icon, returns to the display position at the end of the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon, and then erased. In this way, even if the prefetch notice icon j is displayed, a false effect pattern that does not display the hold change display may be provided.

  FIG. 21 (c) shows a state where the pre-reading notice icon erasure animation has been completed. The prefetch notice icon j is completely erased from the image display area of the sub display device 800.

  FIG. 21 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ 5-6-3 "is stopped and displayed.

  As in the present modification, a fake (gase) effect pattern in which the hold change display is not displayed even when the prefetch notice icon j is displayed may be provided. In addition, when the hold change display is not displayed, the prefetch notice icon j may not be displayed.

(Example 3)
FIG. 22 illustrates an effect example in Example 3 of the present embodiment. 22 (a) to 22 (n) show the production state at each point in time in this order. 22 (a) to 22 (n) are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 (a) of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 22A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 of a default display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 22B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ 5-6-3 "is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 22 (c) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variation icon has started. In the present embodiment, the animation to erase the variation icon is started after the variation stop display of the decorative symbol (after the variation display is completed). In the variation icon erasing animation of the present embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the transmittance gradually increases (a fade-out manner). The change icon erase animation of the present embodiment starts when the transmittance of the change icon f1 starts to increase.

  FIG. 22D shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is executed. In this example, the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon and the prefetch notice icon are displayed as a prefetch notice display for the second hold in FIG. 1 (hold indicated by the special figure 1 hold icon h2). In this embodiment, the look-ahead notice icon j changes in form while gradually increasing from a white circle, and becomes a pattern of the face of Yoshimune of the character taktaku as shown in FIG. The appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is completed at the time shown in FIG. At least a part of the prefetch notice icon j is displayed so as to overlap the variation icon f1 so as to overlap the variation icon f1. The start position of the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is the display start position of the prefetch notice icon j. The display start position of the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon that causes the prefetching notice icon to appear is a position at least partially overlapping the erasure animation of the changing icon that deletes the changing icon.

  FIG. 22 (e) shows a state in which the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is started. 22 (e) and 22 (f), the right downward arrow shown to the right of the prefetch notice icon j indicates the moving direction of the prefetch notice icon j. The moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is an animation in which the prefetch notice icon j is gradually moved from the change icon display area 706 to the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800. Note that the moving animation of the prefetching notice icon displayed after the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon may be displayed as a prefetching notice display. In this example, the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display for the second hold in FIG. In addition, a variation icon erasing animation in which the transmittance of the variation icon f1 gradually increases is executed.

  FIG. 22F shows a state in which the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is being executed. The right third of the pre-reading notice icon j is displayed in an area overlapping the sub display device 800 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right second third portion is displayed in the sub display device 800. And the left third part of the prefetch notice icon j is visible. The sub display device 800 displays an image jb corresponding to a hidden portion of the prefetch notice icon j. The image jb is displayed so that it can be viewed in a row with the prefetching notice icon i when viewed from the front side, and the prefetching notice icon j and the image jb are visually recognized as being displayed as a whole. The As described above, when an animation for moving an image from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 800 is executed, a display corresponding to a portion hidden by the sub display device 800 is displayed on the sub display device 800.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the variation icon erasing animation has ended, and the variation icon f 1 has been completely erased from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 22G shows a state where the moving animation of the pre-reading notice icon has been completed. A prefetch notice icon j is displayed at the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800. When the prefetch notice icon j has been moved to the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800, the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon ends.

  FIG. 22 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon are started. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon h1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area 706. . In FIGS. 22H and 22I, the left-pointing arrow illustrated to the left of the variation icon f2 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f2. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 hold icon h1 becomes the change icon f2 simultaneously with the start of the moving animation of the hold / change icon. At the time shown in FIG. 22 (h), the fluctuation icon f2 is moving toward the outside of the image display area of the sub display device 800, and the left third of the fluctuation icon f2 is not displayed. An image f2b corresponding to the non-displayed portion is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The image f2b is displayed so that it can be viewed with the variation icon f2 as viewed from the front side, and the variation icon f2 and the image f2b are viewed as if the entire variation icon f2 is displayed.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 gradually moves to the first area and is displayed in the third area. The 1 hold icon h3 gradually moves to the second area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area. 22 (h) and (i), the left-pointing arrows shown above the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4 indicate the moving directions of the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4, respectively. A white circular area whose outline is defined by a virtual broken line illustrated in each of the first to fourth areas 802 indicates the display position of the special figure 1 holding icon in each area when the moving animation of the holding icon is not executed. Show.

  FIG. 22 (i) shows a variation display of a decorative symbol, a variation variation of a fourth symbol, and a variation variation of a fifth symbol as the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts. Indicates a state where is started. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started simultaneously.

  FIG. 22J shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon are finished. Instead of the sub display device 800, a variation icon f2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation icon f2 has been moved to the fluctuation icon display area 706. The special figure 1 hold icon h2 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the first area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h3 completes the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the second area. Then, the special figure 1 hold icon h4 has completed the movement of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 to the third area. The movement animation of the hold / variation icon ends when the movement of the change icon to the change icon display area 706 is completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon ends when all the hold icons have been moved to the respective areas.

  FIG. 22 (k) shows a state in which an animation in which the prefetch notice icon j moves to the upper side of the special figure 1 hold icon h2 is executed. In FIG. 22 (k), the arrow pointing downward to the left on the right side of the prefetch notice icon j indicates the moving direction of the prefetch notice icon j. The animation in which the prefetch notice icon j moves to the upper side of the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display is an animation that suggests the start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 22 (l) shows a state in which an animation in which the prefetch notice icon j moves downward is executed. The prefetch notice icon j is displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the hold icon h2 that is the target of the hold change display. When at least a part of the prefetch notice icon j overlaps with the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display, the hold change display is started for the hold icon. The hold change display is a display for changing the hold icon displayed in the first display mode (for example, the default display mode) to a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the present embodiment, the prefetch notice icon j is an icon that suggests the start of the hold change display, and is displayed even after the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends.

  FIG. 22 (m) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. The effect image k is displayed overlapping the prefetch notice icon j and the special figure 1 hold icon h2, and the entire prefetch notice icon j and the special figure 1 hold icon h2 become invisible. Note that the effect image k may be an image displayed in place of the prefetch notice icon j, and the prefetch notice icon j may be deleted when the effect image k is displayed. Further, the effect image k may be displayed so as to overlap with a part of the special figure 1 hold icon h3 different from the hold icon indicating the hold for the pre-reading notice target.

  In the hold change display, the effect image k is gradually erased in such a manner that the display size is gradually reduced, and the hold icon h2 that has changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice is gradually visible. The prefetch notice icon j is deleted before the deletion of the effect image k is started.

  FIG. 22 (n) shows a state where the hold change display is finished. The effect image k is completely erased, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon h2 is visible. The display form of the special figure 1 hold icon h2 is a pattern of the character Yoshimune. The display mode of the picture of Yoshimune's character is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, and is set with higher reliability than the default display mode. As in this example, when the prefetch notice icon j that suggests the start of the hold change display is a picture of Yoshimune's face, the display mode of the hold icon h2 that is the target of the hold change display is the Yoshimune after the hold change display. It becomes the pattern. Even if the look-ahead notice icon j suggesting the start of the hold change display is a picture of Yoshimune's face, the display mode of the hold icon h2 that is the object of the hold change display is the picture of Yoshimune after the hold change display. Even if the prefetch notice icon j suggesting the start of the hold change display is a display form (for example, a heart pattern) other than the face pattern of Yoshimune, the hold change display is possible. The display mode of the hold icon h <b> 2 that is the target of the display may be a pattern of Yoshimune after the hold change display. When the display mode of the prefetch notice icon j is other than the Yoshimune face pattern, the display mode of the hold icon h2 that is the target of the hold change display is a plurality of types of patterns including the Yoshimune pattern after the hold change display. It may be determined by a predetermined lottery so as to be one display mode.

Example 4
FIG. 23 shows an effect example in Example 4 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 23A to 23J show the performance state at each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 23A to 23J are the same as the configurations shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 23A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 of a default display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 23 (b) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variation icon has started. In the present embodiment, the animation for erasing the variation icon is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the variation icon erasing animation of this embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f1 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 23B, an arrow extending in a curved shape toward the upper left illustrated in the upper side of the variation icon f1 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f1, and the outline is defined by a virtual broken line illustrated in the variation icon 706. The white circular area indicates the display position of the variation icon f1 before the variation icon erase animation starts.

  FIG. 23C shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is executed. In this example, the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon and the prefetch notice icon are displayed as a prefetch notice display for the third hold in FIG. 1 (hold indicated by the special figure 1 hold icon h3). In the present embodiment, an aspect in which a prefetch notice icon m of an arrow pattern including a tied paper image (hereinafter referred to as “paper”) n appears from the upper right corner of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is displayed. Note that the paper n may be a prefetch notice icon. With the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon, the prefetching notice icon m moves from the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the lower left corner. Note that the display start position of the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon may be a position where a part of the prefetch notice icon m overlaps the change icon f1 being erased.

  As shown in FIG. 23C, the fifth symbol variation display is displayed overlapping the paper n displayed in the upper right corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the prefetch notice icon m. Has been. It should be noted that the paper n and the prefetch notice icon m may be displayed overlapping the 5th symbol variation display.

  FIG. 23D shows a state in which a display in which the pre-reading notice icon m is stabbed at the left end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Also, a variation icon erasing animation for erasing the variation icon f1 is displayed. A part of the paper n and a part of the prefetch notice icon m are displayed so as to overlap with a part of the change icon f1. Note that a part of the fluctuation icon f1 may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the paper n and a part of the prefetch notice icon m.

  FIG. 23 (e) shows a state where the animation for erasing the variation icon has been completed. The fluctuation icon f1 is deleted from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The variation icon erasing animation of the present embodiment is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is ended during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 23 (f) shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon has been completed. In this example, the paper n associated with the pre-reading notice icon m of the arrow pattern opens and changes to a horizontally long rectangular display mode, and when the paper n is displayed on the upper side of the pre-reading notice icon m, the pre-reading notice is displayed. The icon appearance animation ends. The paper n includes a character string image of “change!”, Which suggests that the pending change display is started by the character string image. Note that the paper n may be displayed as a prefetch notice icon. In this case, the paper n in this example is displayed as a pre-reading display for the third hold in FIG. 1 (hold indicated by the special figure 1 hold icon h3).

  FIG. 23G shows a state in which the hold change display is started. The hold change display of this example is a display that changes the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon h3 indicating the hold of the third special figure 1 that is the object of the pre-reading notice. The effect image k is displayed overlapping the whole of the special figure 1 hold icon h3 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon h2 and h4. The whole special figure 1 hold icon h3 and the special figure 1 hold icon h2 are displayed. , H4 becomes invisible.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 23 (g2), the effect image k may be displayed so as to overlap only with the special figure 1 hold icon h3 indicating the hold that is the target of the prefetching notice. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (g3), the effect image k may be displayed so as to overlap with all the special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4. It should be noted that the effect image k is applied to a part of the special figure 1 holding icon (in the example shown in FIG. 23 (g2), the special figure 1 holding icons h1 and h4) other than the special figure 1 holding icon indicating the holding that is the target of the pre-reading notice. May be displayed in an overlapping manner. The display size of the effect image k may be different each time. The effect image k need only be displayed so as to overlap the hold icon whose display mode changes.

  FIG. 23 (h) shows a state where the hold change display is finished. The effect image k is completely erased, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon h3 is visible. The display form of the special figure 1 hold icon h3 is a pattern of the character Yoshimune. The display mode of the picture of Yoshimune's character is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, and is set with higher reliability than the default display mode.

  FIG. 23 (i) shows a state where the prefetch notice icon m and the paper n are erased. The prefetch notice icon m and paper n are erased after the hold change display is completed. Note that the prefetch notice icon m and paper n may be erased before the end of the hold change display, or the prefetch notice icon m and paper n may be erased at the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 23 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “1-1-7” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon (special figure 1 hold icon h3) different from the hold icon that will be the next variable icon is changed by the hold change display. Thereby, the player may have long expectation for the pre-reading notice effect.

(Example 5)
FIG. 24 shows an effect example in Example 5 of the present embodiment. 24 (a) to 24 (o) show the production state at each point in time in this order. The configurations shown in FIGS. 24A to 24O are the same as the configurations shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 24A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 of a default display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 24B shows a state in which the erase animation of the variation icon has started. In the present embodiment, the animation for erasing the variation icon is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the variation icon erasing animation of this embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f1 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 24B, an arrow extending in a curved shape toward the upper left illustrated in the upper side of the variation icon f1 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f1, and the outline is defined by a virtual broken line illustrated in the variation icon 706. The white circular area indicates the display position of the variation icon f1 before the variation icon erase animation starts.

  FIG. 24C shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is executed. In this example, the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon and the prefetch notice icon are displayed as a prefetch notice display for the second hold in FIG. 1 (hold indicated by the special figure 1 hold icon h2). In the present embodiment, an aspect in which a prefetch notice icon m of an arrow pattern including a tied paper image (hereinafter referred to as “paper”) o appears from the upper right corner of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is displayed. Note that the paper o may be used as a prefetch notice icon. With the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon, the prefetching notice icon m moves from the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the lower left corner. Note that the display start position of the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon may be a position where a part of the prefetch notice icon m overlaps the change icon f1 being erased.

  As shown in FIG. 24C, the fifth symbol variation display is displayed overlapping the paper o displayed in the upper right corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the prefetch notice icon m. Has been. It should be noted that the paper o and the prefetch notice icon m may be displayed overlapping the display of the fifth symbol.

  FIG. 24D shows a state in which a display in which the pre-read notice icon m is stabbed at the left end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Also, a variation icon erasing animation for erasing the variation icon f1 is displayed. A part of the paper o and a part of the prefetch notice icon m are displayed so as to overlap with a part of the change icon f1. A part of the fluctuation icon f1 may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the paper o and a part of the prefetch notice icon m.

  FIG. 24 (e) shows a state in which the animation for deleting the variation icon has been completed. The fluctuation icon f1 is deleted from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The variation icon erasing animation of the present embodiment is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is ended during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 24F shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon has ended. In this example, when the paper o associated with the pre-reading notice icon m of the arrow pattern opens and changes to a horizontally long rectangular display mode, the pre-reading notice is displayed when the paper o is displayed above the pre-reading notice icon m. The icon appearance animation ends. The paper o includes a character string image of “2!”, And the hold of the prefetch notice target is the second hold of the special figure 1 (hold indicated by the special figure 1 hold icon h2) by the character string image. Is suggested. Note that the paper o may be displayed as a prefetch notice icon. In this case, the paper o in this example is displayed as a pre-read display for the second hold in FIG.

  FIG. 24G shows a state in which the prefetch notice icon m is deleted. In this example, the prefetch notice icon m is deleted after the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends.

  FIG. 24 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “1-1-7” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 24I shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started. Also, at the time shown in FIG. 24 (i), the moving animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon h1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area 706. . In FIG. 24I, an arrow extending in a curved shape toward the upper left illustrated on the right side of the variation icon f2 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f2. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 moves to the first area, and the special figure 1 hold displayed in the third area. The icon h3 moves to the second area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 displayed in the fourth area moves to the third area. In FIG. 24 (i), each of the arrows shown in the upper right of the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4 indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (i), the display mode of the paper o changes with the start of the special figure 1 variable game. The paper o has changed to a display mode including a character string image of “1!”, And the character string image indicates that the pre-reading notice hold is the first hold in FIG. 1 (the hold indicated by the special figure 1 hold icon h2). ) Is suggested.

  FIG. 24 (j) shows a state where the animation for erasing the variation icon has started. The variation icon f2 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f2 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 24 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “1-1-7” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 24 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started. Also, at the time shown in FIG. 24 (l), the moving animation between the held / fluctuating icons and the moving animation of the held icons are finished. In the moving animation of the hold / fluctuation icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the fluctuation icon f3 and moves to the fluctuation icon display area 706. In FIG. 24L, an arrow extending in a curved shape toward the upper left illustrated on the right side of the variation icon f3 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f3. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 moves to the first area, and the special figure 1 hold displayed in the second area. The icon h4 moves to the second area. In FIG. 24 (l), the arrows shown at the upper right of the special figure 1 hold icons h3 and h4 indicate the moving directions of the special figure 1 hold icons h3 and h4.

  As shown in FIG. 24L, the display mode of the paper o changes with the start of the special figure 1 variable game. The paper o has changed to a display mode including a character string image of “0!”, And the character string image suggests that the special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game to be notified. The paper o displayed during the special figure variable game subject to the advance notice is displayed as the advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 24 (m) shows a state where the animation for erasing the variable icon has started. The variation icon f3 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f3 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 24 (n) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, the “decoration 7” is displayed in a manner that swings up and down (hereinafter referred to as “swing fluctuation display”). The reach effect is started with the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Note that the paper o is deleted at the start of reach production. The paper o may be deleted during the change display of the notice target.

  A speaker 120 is schematically shown in the lower right part of FIG. At the start of the reach effect, the “reach” sound may be output from the speaker 120 to notify the start of the reach effect.

  FIG. 24 (o) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the special jackpot indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a special jackpot is stopped and displayed. . A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination “7-7−” that notifies the big symbol in the 5th symbol display area 704 is displayed. 7 "is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the paper o that suggests a change in the target of the prefetch notice is displayed as a prefetch notice icon. As described above, an icon suggesting a target of the prefetch notice may be displayed in addition to the hold icon.

(Example 6)
25A to 25F show examples of effects in Example 6-1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 25A to 25F show the performance states at each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 25A to 25F are the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects, so that they have the same reference numerals. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 25A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 of a default display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 25 (b) shows a state where the animation for deleting the variation icon has started. In the present embodiment, the animation for erasing the variation icon is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the variation icon erasing animation of this embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f1 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 25B, an arrow extending in a curved shape toward the upper left illustrated in the upper side of the variation icon f1 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f1, and the outline is defined by a virtual broken line illustrated in the variation icon 706. The white circular area indicates the display position of the variation icon f1 before the variation icon erase animation starts.

  FIG. 25 (c) shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is executed. In this embodiment, a prefetch notice icon m1 of an arrow pattern including a tied paper image (hereinafter referred to as “paper”) n1 and a tied paper image (hereinafter referred to as “paper”) n2 are used. The appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon is displayed in such a manner that the prefetching notice icon m2 of the arrow pattern to be included appears from the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d of the decorative design display device 208. As described above, there may be a plurality of prefetching notice icons appearing by the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon. In the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon, the appearance timings of the plurality of prefetch notice icons may be the same, or the appearance timings of the plurality of prefetch notice icons may be different. For example, the appearance timing of the prefetch notice icon m1 and the prefetch notice icon m2 may be the same, or the appearance timing of the prefetch notice icon m1 and the prefetch notice icon m2 may be different. Note that the papers n1 and n2 may be prefetched notice icons.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (c), the paper n1, n2 and the pre-reading notice icons m1, m2 displayed in the upper right corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are overlapped with the fifth symbol. Fluctuation display is displayed. It should be noted that the papers n1 and n2 and the prefetch notice icons m1 and m2 may be displayed so as to overlap with the variation display of the fifth symbol.

  FIG. 25D shows a state in which a display in which the prefetch notice icons m1 and m2 are stabbed at the left end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Also, a variation icon erasing animation for erasing the variation icon f1 is displayed. A part of the paper n2 and a part of the prefetch notice icon m2 are displayed so as to overlap with a part of the change icon f1. As described above, only one of the plurality of prefetching notice icons may be displayed so as to overlap with the changing icon f1 being erased.

  FIG. 25 (e) shows that the paper n1 associated with the pre-reading notice icon m1 of the arrow pattern opens and changes to a horizontally-long rectangular display mode, and the paper n1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state displayed above the left end is shown. The paper n1 includes a character string image of “change!”, Which suggests that the pending change display is started by the character string image. Further, the prefetch notice icon m1 is deleted as the paper n1 is changed to the opened display mode. In addition, at the time shown in FIG. 25 (e), the erasing animation of the variable icon is finished.

  FIG. 25 (f) shows that the paper n2 associated with the prefetching notice icon m2 of the arrow pattern is opened and changed to a horizontally long display mode, and the paper n2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state displayed at the center of the left end is shown. The paper n2 includes a character string image of “Development!”, And it is suggested that the character string image develops an effect in the special figure change game subject to the pre-reading notice (for example, the reach effect develops into a super reach effect). Is done. Further, the prefetch notice icon m2 is erased as the paper n2 is changed to the opened display mode. In this example, when the paper n2 is opened and displayed in a horizontally long rectangular display mode, the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends.

  FIGS. 25 (a2) to (f2) show examples of effects in Example 6-2 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 25 (a2) to (f2) show the effect state at each time point in time series. 25 (a2) to 25 (f2) are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 (a) of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects, so that they have the same reference numerals. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 25 (a2) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 of a default display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 25 (b2) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variation icon has started. In the present embodiment, the animation for erasing the variation icon is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the variation icon erasing animation of this embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f1 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 25 (b2), an arrow extending in a curved line toward the upper left illustrated in the upper side of the variation icon f1 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f1, and is outlined by a virtual broken line illustrated in the variation icon 706. The white circular area indicates the display position of the variation icon f1 before the variation icon erase animation starts.

  FIG. 25 (c2) shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is executed. In the present embodiment, an aspect in which a prefetch notice icon m of an arrow pattern including a tied paper image (hereinafter referred to as “paper”) n appears from the upper right corner of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is displayed.

  FIG. 25D2 shows a state in which a display in which the prefetch notice icon m is stabbed at the left end portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Also, a variation icon erasing animation for erasing the variation icon f1 is displayed. A part of the paper n and a part of the prefetch notice icon m are displayed so as to overlap with a part of the change icon f1.

  FIG. 25 (e2) shows a state in which the prefetch notice icon m is changed to a display mode that is folded in three. As in this example, there may be provided an effect pattern in which the paper n is not displayed as the prefetch notice display even when the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is executed.

  FIG. 25 (f2) shows a state in which the paper n and the prefetch notice icon m are erased after the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends. When the paper n is not displayed as a prefetch notice display, the prefetch notice icon m is also deleted.

(Example 7)
FIGS. 26A to 26J show examples of effects in Example 7 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 26A to 26J show the production state at each point in time in this order. The configurations shown in FIGS. 26A to 26J are the same as those shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 26A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 of a default display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 26B shows a state in which the fluctuation display of “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started. The symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” is a symbol combination of chances displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  FIG. 26 (c) shows a state where the animation for erasing the variation icon has started. In the present embodiment, the animation for erasing the variation icon is executed during the change stop display of the decorative symbol. In the variation icon erasing animation of this embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f1 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 26D shows a state where the effect image p is displayed. The “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is displayed overlapping the effect image p. The effect image p is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon f1. A part of the lower side of the effect image p is displayed in an area overlapping with the sub display device 800 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part is hidden by the sub display device 800. The sub display device 800 displays effect images pa and pb corresponding to the part. The effect images pa and pb are displayed at the upper end portion of the image display area of the sub display device 800 so that the effect image p can be viewed in a row when viewed from the front side, and the effect image p and the effect images pa and pb are displayed. Thus, the entire effect image is visually recognized.

  In this example, the chance item “effect 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” and the effect image p are displayed as a pre-reading notice display for the first hold in FIG.

  FIG. 26 (e) shows a state where the animation for erasing the variation icon has been completed. The fluctuation icon f1 is deleted.

  FIG. 26 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “1-1-7” is stopped and displayed. Prior to the end of the special figure 1 variable game, the effect images p, pa, and pb are deleted.

  In FIG. 26 (g), similar to FIG. 16 (i), the moving animation of the hold / change icon and the moving animation of the hold icon are started prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 26 (h) shows the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display as the special figure 1 display game 212 is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Indicates a state where is started. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started simultaneously.

  FIG. 26 (i) shows a state in which the moving animation between the held / changed icons and the moving animation of the held icons have been completed.

  FIG. 26 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the special jackpot indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a special jackpot is stopped and displayed. . A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination “7-7−” that notifies the big symbol in the 5th symbol display area 704 is displayed. 7 "is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the chance of the decorative pattern is displayed as a pre-reading notice display. The chance of the decorative pattern may be displayed as a prefetch notice icon. The effect image p may be displayed as a notice icon as a notice display of the change. The effect image p displayed as the notice icon is displayed so as to overlap the variation icon f1 in the erased animation of the variation icon.

(Example 8)
FIG. 27 shows an effect example in Example 8 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 27A to 27R show the effect state at each time point in time series. 27 (a) to 27 (r) are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 (a) of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects, so that they have the same reference numerals. The description is omitted.

  In each figure of FIG. 27, the castle town background is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the castle town background is displayed on the sub display device 800. In this embodiment, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the background image displayed on the sub display device 800 are the same.

  FIG. 27A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the variation icon display area 706, a variation icon f1 having a green (in the figure, right-down hatching) circular display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 in a green circular display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 27B shows a state in which the prefetch notice effect is started. The pre-reading notice effect in this example is started when Yoshimune q is displayed at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the end of the display start animation of the notice icon of Yoshimune q may be at the timing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 27C shows a state in which Yoshimune q has moved to an area including the change icon display area 706 by executing the animation. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed overlapping with a part of Yoshimune q. Note that the end of the display start animation of the notice icon of Yoshimune q may be at the timing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 27 (d) shows a state in which the animation for deleting the variation icon has started. The animation for erasing the variation icon in this example is an animation in which Yoshimune q throws the variation icon f1 in the upper center of the effect display area 208d. The animation for erasing the variation icon is started when Yoshimune q starts the animation for lifting the variation icon f1.

  FIG. 27 (e) shows a state where an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune q threw the change icon f1 is displayed. When viewed from the front side, the fluctuation icon f1 is visually recognized as flying toward the effect movable body 900.

  FIG. 27 (f) shows a state in which a part of the fluctuation icon f 1 overlaps a part of the effect movable body 900 and the part becomes invisible. FIG. 27G shows a state in which a display that makes it appear as if the fluctuation icon f1 collides with the effect movable body 900 is executed. When the variation icon f1 is displayed at a position overlapping the effect movable body 900, the effect image r is displayed overlapping the variation icon f1. The appearance of the effect image r is displayed as an animation. It should be noted that the animation of the appearance of the effect image r may be part of the animation for deleting the variable icon.

  FIG. 27 (h) shows a state in which the effect movable body 900 has moved downward. Due to the downward movement of the effect movable body 900, the entire variation icon f1 overlaps the effect movable body 900 and becomes invisible. A part of the effect image r is visible. At the time shown in FIG. 27 (h), the variation icon erasing animation has not ended, and in this example, the effect movable body 900 moves downward immediately before the variation icon erasing animation ends. If the variation icon f1 is erased after the entire variation icon f1 is hidden by the effect movable body 900, the variation icon erasure animation ends.

  FIG. 27 (i) shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is started. In this example, a pre-reading notice icon s for a picture of a thousand boxes appears from the center of the effect display area 208d. The prefetch notice icon s appears in conjunction with the operation of the production movable body 900. The prefetch notice icon s in this example is an icon that suggests that the hold change display is started. The upper part of the prefetch notice icon s overlaps the effect movable body 900 and is not visible. The pre-reading notice icon s is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b may be displayed so as to overlap the pre-reading notice icon s.

  FIG. 27 (j) shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon is finished and the moving animation of the prefetching notice icon is subsequently started. In this example, the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends when the entire prefetch notice icon r moves to a position where it can be visually recognized. Following the end of the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon, the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is started. For this reason, the prefetch notice icon s continues to move downward without stopping even after the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon ends.

  FIG. 27 (k) shows a state in which the moving animation of the prefetch notice icon is displayed. The pre-reading notice icon s moves toward the sub display device 800 by the moving animation of the pre-reading notice icon. The lower two-thirds of the look-ahead notice icons s are displayed in an area overlapping with the sub display device 800 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lower two thirds are displayed as a sub display. It is hidden by the device 800, and the upper third part of the prefetch notice icon s is visible. On the sub display device 800, an image sb corresponding to the hidden portion of the prefetch notice icon s is displayed. The image sb is displayed at the upper end portion of the image display area of the sub display device 800 so as to be viewed in a row with the prefetching notice icon s when viewed from the front side, and the prefetching notice icon is displayed by the prefetching notice icon s and the image sb. Is displayed in its entirety. When the moving animation of the pre-reading notice icon proceeds, the pre-reading notice icon s is gradually hidden on the sub display device 800, and an image corresponding to the hidden portion is displayed on the sub display device 800. When the pre-reading notice icon s moves to a position where the pre-display notice icon s is entirely hidden by the sub display device 800, the pre-reading notice icon s is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pre-reading notice icon s is displayed on the sub display device 800 instead.

  FIG. 27 (l) shows a state where the moving animation of the pre-read notice icon has been completed. A prefetch notice icon s is displayed at the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800. When the prefetching notice icon s moves to the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800, the prefetching notice icon s stops, and the moving animation of the prefetching notice icon ends. Note that the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon may be used until the prefetching notice icon s moves to the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800.

  FIG. 27 (m) shows a state in which the effect movable body 900 is moving upward. In FIG. 27 (m), the upward arrows shown on the left and right of the effect movable body 900 indicate the moving direction of the effect movable body 900.

  FIG. 27 (n) shows a state where the effect movable body 900 has returned to the initial position. The effect movable body 900 returns to the initial position after the movement of the prefetch notice icon s stops.

  FIG. 27 (o) shows a state in which an effect suggesting the start of the hold change display is started. By changing the display mode of Yoshimune q to a display mode in which a guts pose is performed, an effect suggesting the start of the hold change display is executed.

  FIG. 27 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “1-1-7” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 27 (q) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. The hold change display in this example is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped. In the sub display device 800, an animation of a scene overflowing from a prefetch notice icon s is displayed as a pending change display.

  FIG. 27 (r) shows a state in which the hold change display is finished. Due to the hold change display, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 is changed to an oval pattern. When the change of the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 is finished, the hold change display is finished. The display mode of the oval pattern is a pre-reading notice mode, and is set with a higher expectation than the green circular display mode. The hold of the prefetch notice target in this example may be any of the first to fourth hold in FIG. 1, and in this example, the display mode of the hold icon indicating the hold other than the prefetch notice hold is also changed.

  In the present embodiment, the hold change display is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variable game (during the stop display of the decorative symbol). Note that the hold change display may be executed while the special figure variable game is being executed, and the special figure variable game may be ended after the hold change display is ended.

Example 9
FIG. 28 shows an example effect in Example 9 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 28A to 28O show the effect states at each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 28A to 28O are the same as the configurations shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  28, the castle town background is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the castle town background is displayed on the sub display device 800. In this embodiment, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the background image displayed on the sub display device 800 are the same.

  FIG. 28A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a green circular display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 in a green circular display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 28B shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is executed. In the appearance animation of the look-ahead notice icon in this example, a look-ahead notice icon t with a picture of a thousand boxes appears from the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 28B, the arrow shown at the upper left of the prefetch notice icon t indicates the moving direction of the prefetch notice icon t. The prefetching notice icon t stops at the position shown in FIG. 28B, and the appearance animation of the prefetching notice icon has ended at the time shown in FIG.

  FIG. 28 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “1-1-7” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 28 (d) shows a state where the animation for erasing the variation icon has started. In the present embodiment, the animation for erasing the variation icon is executed during the change stop display of the decorative symbol. In the variation icon erasing animation of this embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f1 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 28D, the arrow shown at the lower right of the variation icon f1 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f1.

  FIG. 28E shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon are started. The moving animation between the holding / changing icons and the moving animation of the holding icons are started prior to the start of the special figure changing game.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon h1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area 706. . In FIGS. 28 (e) and 28 (f), the left-pointing arrow shown to the left of the variation icon f2 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f2.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 gradually moves to the first area and is displayed in the third area. The 1 hold icon h3 gradually moves to the second area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area. In FIGS. 28 (e) and 28 (f), the left-pointing arrows shown above the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4 indicate the moving directions of the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4, respectively. A white circular area whose outline is defined by a virtual broken line illustrated in each of the first to fourth areas 802 indicates the display position of the special figure 1 holding icon in each area when the moving animation of the holding icon is not executed. Show.

  Also, at the time shown in FIG. 28 (e), the variation icon erasing animation has ended, and the variation icon f1 has been erased.

  FIG. 28 (f) shows a variation display of a decorative symbol, a variation display of a fourth symbol, and a variation display of a fifth symbol in accordance with the start of the special symbol 1 variable game by the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown). Indicates a state where is started. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started simultaneously.

  FIG. 28G shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon are finished. Instead of the sub display device 800, a variation icon f2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation icon f2 has been moved to the fluctuation icon display area 706.

  FIG. 28 (h) shows a state in which the display mode of the prefetch notice icon t has changed. The prefetch notice icon t changes from a display mode in which the thousand boxes are closed to a display mode in which the thousand boxes are opened.

  FIG. 28 (i) shows a state in which an erase animation for the prefetch notice icon is started. In the erase animation of the prefetch notice icon in this example, the effect image k is displayed so as to overlap a part of the prefetch notice icon t, and the display size of the effect image k gradually increases, The prefetch notice icon t is deleted by overlapping the prefetch notice icon t. The pre-reading notice icon t is deleted when it entirely overlaps the effect image k.

  FIG. 28 (j) shows a state where the notice item image u has appeared. The notice item image u is a picture of a fan, and is displayed as a notice display of the special figure 1 variable game. The notice item image u may be displayed as a prefetch notice display. The preview item image u is displayed overlapping the effect image k. The preview item image u is displayed overlapping the erase animation of the prefetch preview icon.

  FIG. 28 (k) shows that the erase animation of the prefetch notice icon has ended. When the effect image k is deleted, the delete animation of the pre-reading notice icon ends.

  FIG. 28 (l) shows a state in which a princess character image (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) v in a display mode having a notice item image u is displayed. The princess v is displayed as a notice display of the special figure 1 variable game. The princess v may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  FIG. 28 (m) shows a state in which the notice effect has been executed. A balloon image 720 including a character string image “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed in the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon image 720 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Note that the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon image 720.

  FIG. 28 (n) shows a state where the balloon image 720 has been deleted. The balloon image 720 is deleted before the end of the special figure variable game.

  FIG. 28 (o) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the special jackpot indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a special jackpot is stopped and displayed. . A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination “7-7−” that notifies the big symbol in the 5th symbol display area 704 is displayed. 7 "is stopped and displayed. The princess v is displayed overlapping with the “decoration 7” displayed in the right symbol display area 208a. The “decoration 7” may be displayed overlapping the princess v.

(Example 10)
FIG. 29 shows an effect example in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 29 (a) to (q) show the production state at each point in time in this order. 29 (a) to 29 (q) are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 (a) of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  In each figure of FIG. 29, the castle town background is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the castle town background is displayed on the sub display device 800. In this embodiment, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the background image displayed on the sub display device 800 are the same.

  FIG. 29A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default (blue circle) display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 of a default (blue circle) display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 29B shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon is executed. In the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon in this example, the prefetch notice icon w of the bomb pattern appears from the left end portion of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 29B, the arrow shown at the upper left of the prefetch notice icon w indicates the moving direction of the prefetch notice icon w. Note that the prefetch notice icon w may be displayed so as to overlap the change icon, the hold icon, the button image 706, the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, the fifth symbol, or the like.

  FIG. 29 (c) shows a state in which the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon has been completed. The prefetch notice icon w stops at the position shown in FIG. 29 (c), and the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon has ended at the time shown in FIG. 29 (c).

  FIG. 29 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “1-1-7” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 29 (e) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variation icon has started. In the present embodiment, the animation for erasing the variation icon is executed during the change stop display of the decorative symbol. In the variation icon erasing animation of this embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f1 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 29 (e), the arrow shown at the lower right of the fluctuation icon f1 indicates the moving direction of the fluctuation icon f1.

  FIG. 29F shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon are started. The moving animation between the holding / changing icons and the moving animation of the holding icons are started prior to the start of the special figure changing game.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon h1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area 706. . In FIGS. 29 (f) and 29 (g), the left-pointing arrow shown to the left of the variation icon f2 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f2.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 gradually moves to the first area and is displayed in the third area. The 1 hold icon h3 gradually moves to the second area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area. 29 (f) and 29 (g), the left-pointing arrows shown above the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4 indicate the moving directions of the special figure 1 hold icons h2 to h4, respectively. A white circular area whose outline is defined by a virtual broken line illustrated in each of the first to fourth areas 802 indicates the display position of the special figure 1 holding icon in each area when the moving animation of the holding icon is not executed. Show.

  Also, at the time shown in FIG. 29 (f), the erasure animation of the variation icon is finished, and the variation icon f1 is erased.

  FIG. 29 (g) shows a variation display of the decorative symbol, a variation variation of the fourth symbol, and a variation variation of the fifth symbol as the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts. Indicates a state where is started. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started simultaneously.

  FIG. 29 (h) shows a state where the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the moving animation of the hold icon have been completed. Instead of the sub display device 800, a variation icon f2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation icon f2 has been moved to the fluctuation icon display area 706.

  FIG. 29 (i) shows a state in which the erase animation of the prefetch notice icon w has started. In the erase animation of the look-ahead notice icon in this example, the explosion effect image x is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the look-ahead notice icon w, and the display size of the explosion effect image x is gradually enlarged. When the image x overlaps the entire prefetch notice icon w, the prefetch notice icon w is deleted.

  FIG. 29J shows a state in which the explosion effect image x is displayed so as to overlap the entire prefetch notice icon w and the prefetch notice icon w is deleted. When the explosion effect image x overlaps the entire prefetch notice icon w, the prefetch notice icon w is deleted.

  FIG. 29 (k) shows a state where an icon y suggesting a hold change display has appeared. The icon y includes a character string image of “change” in a rectangular frame image. The icon y is displayed overlapping the explosion effect image x. The icon y is displayed so as to overlap with the erase animation of the prefetch notice icon. The icon y may be displayed as a prefetch notice icon. In this case, the icon y is an icon that starts to be overlapped with the erase animation of the prefetch notice icon w different from the icon y.

  FIG. 29 (l) shows a state where the display size of the explosion effect image x is reduced. The explosion effect image x is erased as its display size is gradually reduced.

  FIG. 29 (m) shows that the erase animation for the prefetch notice icon has ended. When the explosion effect image x is erased, the pre-reading notice icon erasing animation ends.

  FIG. 29 (n) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. The effect image z is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 1 hold icon h3, and the entire prefetch notice icon j and the special figure 1 hold icon h3 become invisible. The effect image k is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the special figure 1 hold icon h2 that is different from the hold icon indicating the hold for the pre-reading notice target. The effect image k may be displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of the hold icon different from the hold icon indicating the hold for the pre-reading notice target.

  In the hold change display, the effect image z is gradually erased in such a manner that the display size is gradually reduced, and the hold icon h <b> 2 that has changed to the display mode of the pre-read notice is gradually visible.

  FIG. 29 (o) shows a state where the hold change display is finished. The effect image z is completely erased, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon h3 is visible. The display form of the special figure 1 hold icon h3 is a fan pattern. The display mode of the fan pattern is a display mode of the pre-reading notice, and is set with higher reliability than the default display mode.

  FIG. 29 (p) shows a state where the icon y suggesting the hold change display has been deleted. The icon y is deleted after the hold change display is completed.

  FIG. 29 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “1-1-7” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon (special figure 1 hold icon h3) different from the hold icon that will be the next variable icon is changed by the hold change display. Thereby, the player may have long expectation for the pre-reading notice effect.

(Example 11)
FIG. 30 shows an effect example in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 30A to 30D show the production state at each point in time in this order. 30 (a) to 30 (d) are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 (a) of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  In each figure of FIG. 30, a wilderness background is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 800 displays an image of a portion displayed in an area overlapping with the sub display device 800 when viewed from the front side in the effect display area 208d. In this example, the sub display device 800 displays an image of a portion of the background image that the sub display device 800 displays in the effect display area 208d. The decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 800 display the wild background of a single picture. The sub display device 800 may display a display that is not related to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the present embodiment, the sub display device 800 is movable along the outer periphery of the decorative symbol display device 208. Rails are disposed along the outer periphery of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the sub display device 800, a roller is attached to the base portion, and the roller is disposed along the rail. The base portion includes a stepping motor that drives the roller. The roller is rotated by the stepping motor, and the roller rotates along the rail, whereby the base portion to which the sub display device 800 is attached can move along the rail. Note that a rack may be provided instead of the rail, and a pinion may be attached to the base, and the base may move along the rack.

  FIG. 30A shows a state where the sub display device 800 is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 30B shows a state in which the sub display device 800 has moved to the right from the initial position. In FIG. 30B, a right-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the sub display device 800 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 800. The sub display device 800 displays a wilderness background of a portion hidden by the sub display device 800 among the wilderness backgrounds displayed in the effect display area 208d. Further, in the sub display device 800, the button image 708 displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden, and the button image 808 is displayed at a position overlapping the button image 708 when viewed from the front side. The button image 808 has the same display form as the button image 708. Thus, the sub display device 800 can display a display hidden by the sub display device 800 among the displays on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 30C shows a state in which the sub display device 800 is moving near the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 30C, a right-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the sub display device 800 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 800. The sub display device 800 displays a button image 808 at a position overlapping the button image 708 when viewed from the front side.

  FIG. 30D shows a state where the sub display device 800 is moving on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 30D, a right-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the sub display device 800 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 800. In the sub display device 800, a part of the variation display of the fifth symbol displayed in the fifth symbol display area 704 is hidden, and the sub display device 800 is located at a position overlapping the portion of the variation display of the fifth symbol as viewed from the front side. The part of the variable display of the 5th symbol is displayed.

  The sub display device 800 may be movable from the initial position to the position shown in FIG. 30 (d), or may be in front of contacting the effect movable body 900 from the initial position. In addition, the sub display device 800 may be capable of moving the entire outer periphery of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the rear side of the effect movable body 900. Further, the sub display device 800 may be movable from the initial position to a symmetrical position (the left position of the decorative symbol display device 208) with respect to FIG. 30D, or the position shown in FIG. To a position symmetrical to the position shown in FIG. 30 (d).

  30 (a) to 30 (d), the effect that the sub display device 800 moves is from the stop display of the decorative symbol variation display to the start of the display of the next decorative symbol variation display, or of the decorative symbol. There may be a case where it starts from the stop display of the change display to the end of the moving animation between the hold and change icons in the change display of the next decorative symbol. In addition, the effect of moving the sub display device 800 shown in FIGS. 30A to 30D is from when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped until the display of the next variation variation of the decorative symbol is started. Alternatively, there may be a case in which the moving animation between the hold / variation icons in the next decorative symbol variation display is terminated after the decorative symbol variation display is stopped.

  FIGS. 30A2 to 30E2 show examples of effects in the modified example of this embodiment. FIGS. 30 (a2) to (e2) show the effect state at each point in time in this order. 30 (a2) to 30 (e2) are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 (a) of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects, so that they have the same reference numerals. The description is omitted.

  The sub display device 800 of this modification can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a rotation driving motor (not shown). is there.

  FIG. 30A2 shows a state in which the sub display device 800 is located at the initial position and is in the initial posture. The sub display device 800 displays a wilderness background of a portion hidden by the sub display device 800 among the wilderness backgrounds displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 30B2 shows a state in which the sub display device 800 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. In FIG. 30B 2, the arrows illustrated on the upper right and lower left of the sub display device 800 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 800. The sub display device 800 displays a wilderness background of a portion hidden by the sub display device 800 among the wilderness backgrounds displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 30 (c2) shows a state in which the sub display device 800 is further rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. The sub display device 800 displays a wilderness background of a portion hidden by the sub display device 800 among the wilderness backgrounds displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 30 (d2) shows a state in which the sub display device 800 is rotated 135 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. In FIG. 30D 2, the arrows illustrated on the upper right and lower left of the sub display device 800 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 800. The sub display device 800 displays a wilderness background of a portion hidden by the sub display device 800 among the wilderness backgrounds displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 30 (e2) shows a state in which the sub display device 800 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. The sub display device 800 displays a wilderness background of a portion hidden by the sub display device 800 among the wilderness backgrounds displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  As described above, the sub display device 800 may be rotatable. The rotation direction of the sub display device 800 may be clockwise or counterclockwise. The sub display device 800 may be capable of vibrating. When the sub display device 800 performs the moving operation, at least a part of the display hidden on the sub display device 800 among the displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 800. Also good. For example, when the sub display device 800 hides the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, or the fifth symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, or the fifth symbol may be displayed on the sub display device 800. Good.

  30 (a2) to 30 (e2) are produced by rotating the sub-display device 800 from the stop display of the decorative symbol variation display until the display of the next decorative symbol variation display is started, or of the decorative symbol. There may be a case where it starts from the stop display of the change display to the end of the moving animation between the hold and change icons in the change display of the next decorative symbol. In addition, the effect that the sub display device 800 shown in FIGS. 30 (a2) to 30 (e2) rotates is from when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped until the display of the next variation variation of the decorative symbol is started. Alternatively, there may be a case in which the moving animation between the hold / variation icons in the next decorative symbol variation display is terminated after the decorative symbol variation display is stopped.

Example 12
FIG. 31 shows an effect example in Example 12 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 31 (a) to (k) and (m) to (o) show the effect state at each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (k) and (m) to (o) are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 (a) of the first embodiment, and exhibit the same operations and effects. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to them and description thereof is omitted.

  In each figure of FIG. 31, the castle town background is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the castle town background is displayed on the sub display device 800. In this embodiment, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the background image displayed on the sub display device 800 are the same.

  FIG. 31A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the variation icon display area 706, a variation icon f1 having a green (in the figure, right-down hatching) circular display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 in a green circular display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 31B shows a state in which the prefetch notice effect is started. The pre-reading notice effect in this example is started when Yoshimune q is displayed at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 31 (c) shows a state where Yoshimune q has moved to an area including the change icon display area 706 by executing the animation. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed overlapping with a part of Yoshimune q.

  FIG. 31 (d) shows a state in which the erase animation of the variation icon has started. The animation for erasing the variation icon in this example is an animation in which Yoshimune q throws the variation icon f1 in the upper center of the effect display area 208d. The animation for erasing the variation icon is started when Yoshimune q starts the animation for lifting the variation icon f1.

  FIG. 31 (e) shows a state where an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune q threw the variation icon f1 is displayed. The variation icon f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a. The variation icon f1 may be displayed overlapping the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation icon f1 may be displayed so as to overlap with the variation display of the decorative design, or the variation display of the decoration design may be displayed overlapping with the variation icon f1.

  FIG. 31 (f) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon erasing animation is being executed. The variation icon f1 is displayed overlapping the variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In FIG. 31G, the variation icon f1 showing a state in which the variation icon erasure animation is being executed has moved to the vicinity of the button image 708.

  FIG. 31 (h) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the fluctuation icon is being executed. An animation in which the variation icon f1 collides with the button image 708 is displayed, and the effect image z is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon f1 and a part of the button image 708.

  FIG. 31 (i) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon f1 has been deleted. In this example, when the change icon f1 is deleted, the display mode of the button image 708 is changed from white to red. In the erase animation of the variation icon in this example, a display for changing the display mode of the button image 708 is performed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be started at the time shown in FIG.

  FIG. 31 (j) shows a state where the erasure animation of the variation icon has been completed. When the effect image z is erased, the animation of erasing the variable icon ends.

  FIG. 31 (k) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period, a balloon image 722 including a character string image “Please press the button!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon image 722 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the balloon image 722 may be displayed before the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period starts.

  FIG. 31L schematically shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136. The left side of FIG. 31 (l) shows a state immediately before the player presses the chance button 136 with the index finger of the left hand. The right side of FIG. 31 (l) shows a state immediately after the player presses the chance button 136 with the index finger of the left hand. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once by the player during the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 31 (m) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. The hold change display in this example is started in response to the chance button 136 being pressed. The effect image z is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 hold icon h2, and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon h2 becomes invisible. Note that the sub display device 800 and the effect movable body 900 may perform a moving operation in response to the press of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 31 (n) shows a state in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon h2 is changed to the fan pattern by the hold change display. In the hold change display of this example, after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the effect image z.

  FIG. 31 (o) shows a state in which the hold change display is finished. The hold change display ends when the effect image z is erased.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon (special figure 1 hold icon h2) different from the hold icon that becomes the next variable icon is changed by the hold change display. Thereby, the player may have long expectation for the pre-reading notice effect. When the sub display device 800 performs the moving operation, at least a part of the display hidden on the sub display device 800 among the displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 800. Also good. For example, when the sub display device 800 hides the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, or the fifth symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, or the fifth symbol may be displayed on the sub display device 800. Good.

  The effect display of the variation icon erasure animation shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (o), the effect display suggesting the operation of the chance button 136, and the hold change display are performed from the stop display of the variation display of the decoration symbol to the next decoration symbol variation. It may start until the display starts, or until the moving animation between the hold / fluctuation icons in the next decorative symbol's variable display stops after the decorative symbol's variable display stops. Also good. In addition, the effect display of the variation icon erasing animation shown in FIGS. 31A to 31O, the effect display suggesting the operation of the chance button 136, and the hold change display are performed after the decorative symbol change display is stopped and displayed. Until the display of the decorative symbol variation display starts, or after the decorative symbol variation display is stopped, until the moving animation between the hold and variation icons in the next decorative symbol variation display ends. It may end.

  The effect display suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 31 (j) may be executed while the decorative symbol is stopped, or may be executed after the next decorative symbol variation display is started. Alternatively, it may be executed during execution of the moving animation between the on-hold / fluctuating icons in the next variation display of the decorative design, or may be executed during the deletion animation of the changing icons. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the effect display of the erasure animation of the variable icon using the chance button 136 may be started.

(Example 13)
FIG. 32 shows an effect example in Example 13 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 32A to 32I show the effect state at each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 32A to 32I are the same as those shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects, so that they have the same reference numerals. The description is omitted.

  32, the castle town background is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the castle town background is displayed on the sub display device 800. In this embodiment, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the background image displayed on the sub display device 800 are the same.

  FIG. 32A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the variation icon display area 706, a variation icon f1 having a green (in the figure, right-down hatching) circular display mode is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802, special figure 1 hold icons h1 to h4 in a green circular display mode are displayed.

  FIG. 32B shows a state in which the prefetch notice effect is started. The pre-reading notice effect in this example is started by displaying Yoshimune q at the right end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yoshimune q is displayed as a prefetch notice icon.

  FIG. 32C shows a state in which Yoshimune q has moved to a position where it overlaps the button image 708 by executing the animation. The button image 708 is displayed overlapping with Yoshimune q.

  FIG. 32D shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune q throws the button image 708 is started. An animation in which Yoshimune q throws the button image 708 toward the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed. In FIG. 32D, Yoshimune q is displayed overlapping the button image 708.

  FIG. 32E shows a state where an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune q threw a button image 708 is displayed. The button image 708 is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c. While the button image 708 is moving, the button image 708 may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display. During the movement of the button image 78, the button image 708 may be displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative design, or the variation display of the decoration design may be displayed overlapping the button image 708. May be.

  FIG. 32F shows a state where the moving animation of the button image 708 is displayed. Due to the moving animation of the button image 708, the button image 708 is moving toward the sub display device 800. The lower half of the button image 708 is displayed in an area overlapping the sub display device 800 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lower half of the button image 708 is the sub display device. The upper half of the button image 708 is visible. On the sub display device 800, an image 708a corresponding to a hidden portion of the button image 708 is displayed. An image 708a is displayed at the upper end portion of the image display area of the sub display device 800 so that the button image 708 can be viewed continuously from the front side, and the button image 708 and the image 708a make the entire button image appear. Is displayed. When the moving animation of the button image proceeds, the button image 708 is gradually hidden on the sub display device 800, and an image corresponding to the hidden portion is displayed on the sub display device 800. When the button image 708 moves to a position where the entire image is hidden by the sub display device 800, the button image 708 is deleted from the decorative design display device 208, and the button image 708 is displayed on the sub display device 800 instead.

  FIG. 32G shows a state where the moving animation of the button image has been completed. A button image 708 is displayed at the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800. When the button image 708 moves to the upper center of the image display area of the sub display device 800, the button image 708s stops and the moving animation of the button image 708 ends. It should be noted that the movement destination of the button image 708 by the moving animation of the button image may be within the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 32H shows a state in which the display mode of the button image 708 has been changed. The display mode of the button image 708 is changed from white to red. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be started at the time shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32 (i) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period, a balloon image 724 including a character string image “Please press the button!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon image 724 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the balloon image 724 may be displayed before the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period starts.

  The effect display suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (j) is from the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol until the start of the variation display of the next decorative symbol, or the variation of the decorative symbol. There may be a case where the display starts after the display is stopped and before the moving animation between the hold / change icons during the change display of the next decorative symbol ends. In addition, the effect display that suggests the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. 32A to 32J is from when the decorative symbol variation display is stopped to when the next decorative symbol variation display is started. There may be a case in which the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons in the next decoration symbol change display is ended after the change display of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Example 14)
FIG. 33 shows an effect example in Example 14 of the present embodiment. 33 (a) to (c) and (e) to (o) show the production state at each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 33A to 33C and FIGS. 33E to 33O are the same as those shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment, and have the same operations and effects. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to them and description thereof is omitted.

  33, the castle town background is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the castle town background is displayed on the sub display device 800. In this embodiment, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the background image displayed on the sub display device 800 are the same.

  FIG. 33A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. In the fourth symbol display regions 700 and 7002, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In the fifth symbol display region 704, the fifth symbol variation is displayed. Fluctuation display is in progress. In the fluctuation icon display area 706, a fluctuation icon f1 having a default display mode is displayed. The special figure 1 hold number is 0, and the special figure 1 hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802.

  FIG. 33B shows a state where the notice effect has been started. In the notice effect of this example, an arrow icon notice icon 726 appears from the upper right corner of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which a moving animation of the notice icon is being executed. In the moving animation of the notice icon in this example, the notice icon 726 moves toward the fluctuation icon f1. The moving advance notice icon 726 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display when moving the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed so as to overlap the notice icon 726.

  FIG. 33 (d) shows a state immediately before the game ball 910 enters the special figure 1 starting port 230. The arrow in FIG. 33 (d) indicates the falling direction of the game ball 910. The game ball 910 enters the special figure 1 starting port 230 after the timing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 33 (e) shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “pending icon increase animation”) is started. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the special figure 1 hold icon h1 gradually rises from the lower end of the first area of the special figure 1 hold display area 802 of the sub display device 800.

  FIG. 33 (f) shows a state in which the prefetch notice effect is executed. In this example, the sub display device 800 moves upward as a pre-reading notice effect. In FIG. 33 (f), the arrows shown at the lower left and right of the sub display device 800 indicate the moving direction of the sub display device 800. In this way, when there is a winning at a start opening (for example, special figure 1 start opening 230) with a high expectation for a big hit, a sub-display is displayed while the decorative symbol is changing (during the execution of the special figure changing game). The apparatus 800 may be moved as a pre-reading notice effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), the sub display device 800 hides a part of the notice icon 726. The sub display device 800 may hide at least a part of a display prompting an operation of the chance button 136 such as a notice icon, a prefetch notice icon, or a button image 708. It should be noted that the sub display device 800 may not be moved from the initial position during the super reach production or the big hit game.

  Further, in FIG. 33 (f), the increase animation of the hold icon is finished. The special figure 1 hold icon h1 is located above the hold icon display position image g1 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802.

  FIG. 33 (g) shows a state where the moving animation of the notice icon has been completed. When the notice icon 726 is inserted into the change icon f1, the moving animation of the notice icon ends.

  FIG. 33 (h) shows a state in which change display of the change icon is executed. Due to the change display of the change icon, the change icon f1 is changed from blue to red (indicated by white dots on the white background). In this example, the change icon change display is started after the notice icon 726 is inserted into the change icon f1, and the notice icon 726 is a display suggesting the start of the change icon change display.

  FIG. 33 (i) shows a state where the notice icon 726 has been deleted. The notice icon 726 is deleted after the change display of the change icon is completed.

  FIG. 33 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. Is done. A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination other than the symbol combination informing the 5th symbol display area 704 of the winning combination “ “7-1-1” is stopped and displayed.

  The substantially lower half of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c is hidden by the sub display device 800. When the decorative display of the decorative symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol of the portion hidden by the sub display device 800 may be displayed on the sub display device 800.

  FIG. 33 (k) shows a state in which the erase animation of the variation icon has started. In this embodiment, the animation for erasing the variation icon is started during the change stop display of the decorative symbol. In the variation icon erasing animation of this embodiment, the variation icon f1 is erased in such a manner that the variation icon f1 gradually moves to the upper left and disappears outside the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 33 (k), an arrow extending in a curved shape toward the upper left illustrated on the upper side of the variation icon f1 indicates the moving direction of the variation icon f1.

  FIG. 33 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started. In addition, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon h1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 becomes the change icon f2 and becomes the change icon display area. 706 is displayed. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 moves to the first area, and the special figure 1 hold displayed in the third area. The icon h3 moves to the second area, and the special figure 1 hold icon h4 displayed in the fourth area moves to the third area.

  FIG. 33 (m) shows a state in which the notice effect has been executed. On the sub display device 800, a white plain background image is displayed, a character string image of “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed on the background image, and a notice effect is executed. During execution of the notice effect of this example, the hold icon may be hidden.

  FIG. 33 (n) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 33 (o) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the special jackpot indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a special jackpot is stopped and displayed. . A black 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 700, a white 4th symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 702, and a symbol combination “7-7−” that notifies the big symbol in the 5th symbol display area 704 is displayed. 7 "is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is executed by the movement operation of the sub display device 800. Note that the prefetching notice effect may be executed by the moving operation of the effect movable body 900. When the sub display device 800 performs the moving operation, at least a part of the display hidden on the sub display device 800 among the displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 800. Also good. For example, when the sub display device 800 hides the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, or the fifth symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, or the fifth symbol may be displayed on the sub display device 800. Good.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 33 again.
(1)
A game machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a sub display device 800) capable of displaying a notice display (for example, a notice display of the change, a pre-read notice display),
The display means includes a plurality of types of animations (e.g., an animation for deleting a change icon, an appearance animation for a prefetch notice icon, a movement animation for a prefetch notice icon, a movement animation between hold and change icons, a movement animation of a hold icon, and a hold icon. (Change animation) can be displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (for example, a fluctuation icon, a notice icon, a prefetch notice icon, a special figure 1 hold icon, a special figure 2 hold icon),
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon (for example, the variation icon f1 in the erasure animation of the variation icon),
One of the plurality of types of icons is a notice icon (for example, prefetch notice icon i, prefetch notice icon j, prefetch notice icon m),
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the notice display,
One animation of the plurality of types of animation is a first animation (for example, a deletion icon erased animation),
The first animation is an animation including an erasing scene of a fluctuation icon,
The first icon is the variation icon in the first animation,
The notice icon is an icon that may at least partially overlap the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it may be possible to focus the variation icon until the variation icon disappears. In addition, there may be a case where the player is made to think that the change display has not ended yet by overlapping the erase animation of the change icon and the start animation of another icon.

(2)
The gaming machine according to (1) above,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design (for example, a decorative design shown in FIG. 5C),
The first animation is an animation that may be displayed during the stop display of the decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the change stop is performed by performing the first animation production (for example, the deletion of the change icon and the appearance of the notice icon) after the timing of the change stop that is sure to come every change. In some cases, the player's expectation can be sustained until later.

(3)
The game stand according to (2) above,
The first animation is an animation that is not displayed during the variation display of the decoration symbol (for example, displayed only during the stop display of the decoration symbol).
A game stand characterized by that.

(4)
The gaming machine according to (1) above,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design (for example, a decorative design shown in FIG. 5C),
The first animation is an animation that may be displayed during the variation display of the decorative design.
A game stand characterized by that.

(5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon (for example, prefetch notice icons i, j, m in the appearance animation of the prefetch notice icon),
One of the plurality of types of animation is a second animation (for example, an appearance animation of a prefetch notice icon, an appearance animation of the notice icon),
The second animation is an animation including an appearance scene of the notice icon,
The second icon is the notice icon in the second animation,
The second animation is an animation that may be displayed during the display of the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(6)
The game stand according to (5) above,
In the second animation, the second icon (for example, the pre-reading notice icon i, j in the appearance animation of the pre-reading notice icon) is at least the first icon (eg, the changing icon f1 in the erasing animation of the changing icon). The display starts to overlap with a part,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, there is a case where attention can be paid to the variation icon until the variation icon disappears.

(7)
The game table according to (5) or (6) above,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a prefetch notice display (for example, a prefetch notice icon, a balloon image 710, an appearance animation of a prefetch notice icon, a moving animation of a prefetch notice icon),
One of the plurality of types of icons is a prefetch notice icon (for example, prefetch notice icon i, prefetch notice icon j),
The prefetch notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice display,
The second animation is an animation that may be displayed as the prefetch notice display,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (5) to (7) above,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons (for example, a plurality of special figure 1 hold icons, a plurality of special figure 2 hold icons),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds (for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2),
The display means displays the hold icon displayed in the first display mode (for example, the default display mode) in a second display mode (for example, the display mode for the pre-reading notice, Yoshimune, which is different from the first display mode). Is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter referred to as “pending change display”).
The notice icon is an icon indicating the start of the hold change display,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed even after the second animation ends (see, for example, FIGS. 16 (e) to (q)),
The second animation ends when the display of the second icon is completed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(9)
The game stand according to (8) above,
The hold change display includes the hold icon (for example, the special figure 1 hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 17 (m) and the special figure 1 hold icon shown in FIG. 22 (l) for which the notice icon is the target of the hold change display. h2) is a display that may be started for the hold icon when at least part of it overlaps.
A game stand characterized by that.

(10)
The game table according to (8) or (9) above,
The hold change display is a display that can be started with respect to the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display even when the notice icon is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(11)
The game stand according to any one of (8) to (10) above,
The notice icon is displayed at a first position (for example, above the special icon 1 hold icon display area 802 (see, for example, the prefetch notice icon j shown in FIG. Position), an icon that passes through the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the upper display area of the sub display device 800).
A game stand characterized by that.

(12)
The game stand according to any one of (8) to (11) above,
The hold change display is a display that is not performed on the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(13)
The gaming machine according to any one of (5) to (12) above,
When the display of the second animation is not started, the second icon and the first icon do not overlap (for example, see FIG. 16 (m)),
A game stand characterized by that.

(14)
The gaming machine according to any one of (5) to (13) above,
The second animation is an animation that is not displayed during the electric support.
A game stand characterized by that.

(15)
The gaming machine according to any one of (5) to (14) above,
The second animation is an animation that is displayed only during Den Sapo,
A game stand characterized by that.

(16)
The gaming machine according to any one of (5) to (15) above,
Only when the first animation is started and the hold icon is displayed (for example, the hold number of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is 1 or more and the hold icon is displayed. Only if you may start the second animation,
A game stand characterized by that.

(17)
The gaming machine according to any one of (5) to (16) above,
The second icon is an icon displayed overlapping the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(18)
The gaming machine according to any one of (5) to (17) above,
When the variation icon is deleted without displaying the first animation, the second icon and the variation icon do not overlap.
A game stand characterized by that.

(19)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (18) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(A1)
Display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 800);
A prefetch notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of starting a plurality of prefetch notices;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means includes a plurality of types of animations (e.g., an animation that erases a change icon, an appearance animation of a prefetching notice icon, a moving animation of a prefetching notice icon, a moving animation of a notice icon, Or a moving animation of a hold icon or a change animation of a hold icon)
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (for example, a fluctuation icon, a notice icon, a prefetch notice icon, a special figure 1 hold icon, and a special figure 2 hold icon),
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon (for example, a variation icon),
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon (for example, a prefetch notice icon),
The first icon is an icon related to the decorative design being displayed in a variable manner,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice,
The first icon and the second icon are different icons,
One animation of the plurality of types of animation is a first animation (for example, a deletion icon erased animation),
The first animation is an animation including an erase scene of the first icon,
The first animation is displayed until the next variation display is started after the decoration symbol variation is stopped (see, for example, FIGS. 16B to 16F).
While the first animation is being displayed, the second icon (for example, the pre-reading notice icon i shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D or the pre-reading notice icon j shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E). Is displayed at least partially overlapping the first icon (for example, the fluctuation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D and the fluctuation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E). Configured to
The display of the second icon may not start during the display of the first animation (see, for example, FIGS. 16 (m) and (n)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A1) above,
The second icon (for example, the prefetching notice icon i shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D and the prefetching notice icon j shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E) is the same as that in the first animation. It is an icon that is displayed overlapping with the first icon (for example, the fluctuation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D and the fluctuation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E). ,
When the first icon is erased by the first animation, a display area where the second icon is displayed is expanded.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A3)
The game stand according to (A1) or (A2) above,
A holding storage means (for example, a special figure 1 random value storage area or a special figure 2 random value storage area of the RAM 308) capable of storing start information (for example, special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) as a hold,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a hold icon (for example, special figure 1 hold icon or special figure 2 hold icon),
The display means (for example, the sub display device 800) is a means provided with a hold display area (for example, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802 or the special figure 2 hold icon display area) capable of displaying the hold icon. ,
It is configured such that the number of suspensions of the decorative symbol change display operation (for example, the number of suspensions of special figure 1 or special figure 2) can be displayed by the number of the suspension icons,
The display means changes the hold icon displayed in a first display mode (for example, a default display mode) to a second display mode (for example, a display mode for a pre-reading notice) different from the first display mode. It is a means capable of displaying a display to be changed (hereinafter referred to as “hold change display” (for example, a hold change display shown in FIG. 17 (n)).
One of the plurality of prefetch notices is the hold change display,
One of the plurality of types of animation is a second animation (for example, a moving animation of a prefetch notice icon),
The second animation is an animation including a moving scene of the second icon (for example, the prefetch notice icon j shown in FIGS. 17D to 17H).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A4)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A3) above,
The second icon (for example, the prefetch notice icon j shown in FIGS. 17D to 17H) is an icon displayed as an icon indicating the start of the hold change display,
The display of the second animation (for example, the moving animation of the pre-reading notice icon) is started while the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the second animation is completed while the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped. (See, for example, FIGS. 17 (e) to (h)),
Due to the display of the second animation, the second icon is placed in the hold display area (for example, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802) rather than the position of the decorative symbol stop display (for example, the pattern display areas 208a to 208c). ) (See, for example, FIG. 17 (h)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(A5)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A4) above,
The second holding icon (for example, the special figure 1 holding icon h2 shown in FIGS. 17 (l) and 17 (m)) is the second holding icon (for example, the holding change display shown in FIG. 17 (n)). An icon (for example, the pre-reading notice icon j shown in FIGS. 17 (l) and 17 (m)) is displayed in an overlapping manner so that the hold change display is displayed.
The second icon (for example, the prefetch notice icon j shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B) is an icon that may be deleted without overlapping the hold icon,
The second icon overlaps and the hold change display is performed rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is erased without overlapping and the hold change display is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easily displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A6)
The game stand according to (A4) or (A5) above,
The second icon (for example, the look-ahead notice icon j shown in FIGS. 17E to 17M) is the hold icon (for example, FIG. 17) of the second display mode (for example, the character's Yoshimune pattern). It is an icon including at least a part of the special figure 1 hold icon h2) shown in (o) to (q).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A7)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A3) above,
The second icon (for example, the prefetch notice icon i shown in FIGS. 16D to 16R) is an icon displayed as the prefetch notice not related to the hold change display,
The display of the second animation is started while the decorative symbol fluctuation is stopped, and the second animation is completed while the decorative symbol fluctuation is stopped (for example, FIGS. 16B to 16B). h))
Due to the display of the second animation, the second icon is placed in the hold display area (for example, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802) rather than the position of the decorative symbol stop display (for example, the pattern display areas 208a to 208c). )
A game stand characterized by that.
(A8)
The game stand according to any one of (A3) to (A7) above,
The display means includes a plurality of display devices (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a sub display device 800).
One display device of the plurality of display devices is a first display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
One display device of the plurality of display devices is a second display device (for example, the sub display device 800),
The first display device is a display device capable of displaying the decorative design,
The first display device is a display device capable of displaying the first icon (for example, a variation icon),
The second display device is a display device including the hold display area (for example, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 802).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A9)
The game stand according to any one of (A3) to (A8) above,
One animation of the plurality of types of animation is an on-holding reduction animation (for example, a moving animation of the on-hold icon shown in FIGS. 16 (h) and (i)),
In the case where the hold icon is displayed, the display of the hold-decreasing animation is started when the decoration symbol starts to change (see, for example, FIGS. 16H and 16I). ,
A game stand characterized by that.
(A10)
The game stand according to any one of (A3) to (A9) above,
The second animation is the stop of the second icon (for example, the prefetch notice icon i shown in FIGS. 16E to 16G or the prefetch notice icon j shown in FIGS. 17F to 17H). End by display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(A11)
The game stand according to any one of (A3) to (A10) above,
The second animation is an animation that is displayed after the first animation is displayed (for example, see FIG. 16E and FIG. 17F).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A12)
The game stand according to any one of (A3) to (A11) above,
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300);
Sub-control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) capable of receiving commands from the main control means;
First symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212 and special figure 2 display device 214);
A second symbol display means (for example, the fourth symbol display areas 700 and 702 and the fifth symbol display area 704);
With
The main control means is means capable of controlling the first symbol display means,
The sub-control means is means capable of controlling the second symbol display means,
The display means is means provided with the second symbol display means,
The symbol variation display by the second symbol display means (for example, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the variation display of the fifth symbol) is executed in conjunction with the symbol variation display by the first symbol display means. Configured,
The first animation is an animation that is started during the stop display of the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means (see, for example, FIG. 16 (c) and FIG. 17 (c)),
The second animation is an animation started during the stop display of the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means (see, for example, FIG. 16C and FIG. 17D).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A13)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A12) above,
The first icon is an icon that is erased while the decoration symbol is suspended (see, for example, FIGS. 16C to 16F and FIGS. 17C to 17G).
The second icon is an icon that starts to be displayed while the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped (see, for example, FIGS. 16C, 16D, 17D, and 17E).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B1)
Display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 800);
A prefetch notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of starting a plurality of prefetch notices;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “design variation display”),
The display means includes a plurality of types of animations (e.g., an animation that erases a change icon, an appearance animation of a prefetching notice icon, a moving animation of a prefetching notice icon, a moving animation of a notice icon, Or a moving animation of a hold icon or a change animation of a hold icon)
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (for example, a fluctuation icon, a notice icon, a prefetch notice icon, a special figure 1 hold icon, and a special figure 2 hold icon),
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon (for example, a variation icon),
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon (for example, a prefetch notice icon),
The first icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display during variation display,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice,
The first icon and the second icon are different icons,
One animation of the plurality of types of animation is a first animation (for example, a deletion icon erased animation),
The first animation is an animation including an erase scene of the first icon,
The first animation is displayed until the next variation display is started after the decoration symbol variation is stopped (see, for example, FIGS. 16B to 16F).
While the first animation is being displayed, the second icon (for example, the pre-reading notice icon i shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D or the pre-reading notice icon j shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E). Is displayed at least partially overlapping the first icon (for example, the fluctuation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D and the fluctuation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E). Configured to
The display of the second icon may not start during the display of the first animation (see, for example, FIGS. 16 (m) and (n)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (B1) above,
The first animation ends when the first icon is deleted (for example, see FIGS. 16C to 16F and FIGS. 17C to 17F).
A game stand characterized by that.

Examples of the display that may overlap the second icon, such as the first icon, include a decorative pattern, a fourth pattern, a button image, a conversation notice display, and a tutorial display. These displays may be displayed on the sub display device 800 so as to overlap the second icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. These displays may be the first icon.
The movable body (for example, the sub display device 800 and the effect movable body 900) may be moved to a position overlapping the second icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Examples of the display that may overlap the first icon, such as the second icon, include a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, a mini item, and a button image. These displays may be the second icon.

A movable body may overlap the first icon. At this time, the movable body and the first icon may overlap at the start of the operation of the movable body.
The second display means (sub display device 800, versatile writer, illumination panel, light guide plate, PM plate) may overlap the first icon displayed on the first display means (decorative symbol display device 208). .
The first icon and the second icon may be displayed on the sub display device 800.
A reserve increase animation may overlap the first icon.
A hold change display (pending change animation) may overlap the first icon. At this time, the effect image may overlap the first icon.

Note that a sound for notifying increase in hold may be output from the speaker 120 when the hold increases. The sound may be output as a prefetch notice. The audio may be output as a pre-reading notice for determining the jackpot.
When the holding increases, the game board lamp 532 and the game stand frame lamp 542 may emit light in a predetermined pattern.
A movable body (for example, the sub display device 800 and the effect movable body 900) may be superimposed on various icons displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.
As shown in the look-ahead notice icon i shown in FIG. 16F and the effect image shown in FIG. May be.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in Examples 1 to 14 and the modified examples can be combined.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 34 to 39 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a fourth display device. As display means. Similarly to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the fourth display device are arranged in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. . The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are display regions that are smaller than the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and have a vertically long rectangular display region. In the present embodiment, liquid crystal display devices are employed as the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, various effects and various game information can be displayed without using the liquid crystal display device. Others including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector The display device may be adopted. Note that the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 34 to 65 is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  Here, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N will be described. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the player side facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front” (front, front side, etc.), and the opposite is “back” (rear, rear side). And In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the vertical upper direction is “up” (upper, upper, upper, upper end, etc.) when viewed from the player, and the opposite is “lower” (lower, lower, Lower, lower end, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the horizontal left when viewed from the player is “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and the opposite is “right” (right, right, Right end).

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L is disposed substantially at the center of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 3, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The symbol display device 208N is arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position in the front-rear direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the same position. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and are in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and in a plane parallel to the display screen. It can move left and right. In the state shown in FIG. 34 (a), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are located at the initial positions, and viewed in the front-rear direction, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M. A part of the decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be movable by being driven by a stepping motor or the like.

  Display control of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the fourth display device is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. Note that a separate control unit (for example, a liquid crystal control unit) that performs display control of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the fourth display device may be provided. Good.

  Further, a fourth display device is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the fourth display device. ing. The fourth display device has a transparent light guide plate having a rectangular flat plate shape. The light guide plate of the fourth display device is arranged so that the plate surface is parallel to the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. For example, a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied to the light guide plate. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the fourth display device may be movable. For example, the fourth display device may be driven by a stepping motor or the like and movable in the left-right direction in a plane in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and parallel to the display screen. Note that the fourth display device may use a transmissive liquid crystal panel or a transmissive organic EL panel in place of the transparent light guide plate.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34A, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. 34 to 48, the decorative design is displayed surrounded by a rectangular frame display. The display color in the frame display surrounding the odd decorative pattern (“decoration 1”, “decoration 3”, “decoration 5”, “decoration 7”, “decoration 9”) is red. 2 ”,“ decoration 4 ”,“ decoration 6 ”,“ decoration 8 ”,“ decoration 10 ”), the display color in the frame display is blue. The pachinko machine 100 displays the inside of the frame surrounding the three decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in red or blue, thereby determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree). It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice. In the example shown in FIG. 34A, the frame display surrounding “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is displayed in red (indicated by lattice hatching in FIGS. 34 to 39). The display of the pre-reading notice displayed in red in the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is the display of the pre-reading notice of the red chance. The jackpot reliability in the pre-reading notice of the chance is set higher in red than in blue. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display the decorative symbol itself in red or blue to execute a pre-reading notice for the chance.

  A holding frame UI is provided below the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A variation icon display area is provided in the center of the holding frame UI, and a variation icon is displayed so as to be placed on the upper surface of the columnar stage cs. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area when the hold is consumed and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the mode (display mode) of the variation icon, it is possible to execute the advance notice of the variation with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding whether or not the special figure variation game is successful. In the example shown in FIG. 34A, the variation icon c1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching in FIGS. 34 to 39) circular shape. The white circular mode is a default mode and is the mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among a plurality of modes.

  To the left of the fluctuation icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon display area is provided. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the number of the special figure 1 hold icons corresponding to the number of the special figure 1 hold can be displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can inform the special figure 1 on-hold icon display area of the number of special icons 1 on-hold according to the number of the special icons 1 in FIG. It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice with a predetermined jackpot reliability whether the special game 1 is a variable game. The special figure 1 hold icon display area f is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from right to left. Ellipse-shaped first stage hs1 to hs4 indicating the display position of the hold icon in FIG. 1 are displayed at the lower part of each of the first to fourth areas. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. In the first area, the hold icon of FIG. 1 corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas, the hold icons corresponding to the second to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 34 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is two, and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 are in the first area and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Each is displayed. The first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 are displayed overlapping each upper end of the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. The first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 are displayed in a white circular form. The white circular mode is a default mode and is the mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among the multiple modes. Note that the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold whose special figure 1 prefetch result is “undecided” may be displayed in a default mode. In this case, the reliability of the default mode is not set. The holding frame UI may be provided on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, may be provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display device may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 34A, the variation icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. This may facilitate the identification of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, a special figure 2 hold icon display area is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area. In the special figure 2 holding icon display area, the number of holding icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 holding icon display area, it is possible to notify the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game according to the number of the holding icons of the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 fluctuation related to the holding depending on the mode of each holding icon. It is possible to make a pre-notification notice about whether or not a game is successful with a predetermined jackpot reliability. In the example shown in FIG. 34 (a), since the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon in the special figure 2 is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. When the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, as shown in FIG. 34A, a horizontally long tutorial display ts is provided so as to overlap a part of the special figure 2 hold icon display area. . In the tutorial display ts, it is possible to display a tutorial display and a notice display such as a description of the way of playing, the contents of the effects, and the description of the character as a character image.

  A fifth symbol pd5 is displayed on the upper part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The fifth symbol is displayed by combining the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. During execution of special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game, the symbols in the middle left and right of the fifth symbol are “1” → “2” → “3” → ... → “9” → “0” → “ Fluctuation display of the fifth symbol which is switched in the order of “1” →... Is executed. In each figure, the variable display of the fifth symbol is represented by a downward arrow. In the fifth symbol, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to notify the determination result of the special figure variation game.

  In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 34 (a), a numerical value display hn of the number of reservations is displayed. The numerical value display hn of the number of holdings here indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “1” and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is “0”. Further, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as “mini character”) is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable state or not (so-called constant display), and is displayed across the variable display of the third symbol pd3 multiple times. The In the example shown in FIG. 34, the display of the character cd of the lord who becomes the main character is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the lord-like character cd shown in FIG. 34 (a) is the initial posture.

  An information display unit ST1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 34, the name of the background stage is displayed on the information display unit ST1. Here, it is a castle town stage, “castle town” is displayed on the information display section ST1, and the streets of the castle town are displayed in common in the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The information display unit ST1 may display an effect mode, a current control state (for example, during probability change), a pre-reading notice, or a currently performed symbol. A notice (normal notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an eight generations 224Fa and a general combination 224Fb. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa is arranged on the upper left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the general character item 224Fb is arranged on the upper right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right end of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa is the general character character 224Fb. It is arranged adjacent to the left end of. The positions in the front-rear direction of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are the same, and are the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa has a horizontally long rectangular plate on which a part of the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, “Yatsushiro”) is written, and the general character 224Fb It has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate on which a part of the model name or the like (in this example, “general”) is written. Further, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb have full-color LEDs and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 34A, the eight generations 224Fa and the general 224Fb emit light in white (indicated by dot hatching in FIGS. 34 to 48).

  The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move in the vertical direction in a plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen. In the state shown in FIG. 34A, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are located at the initial positions.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208. The family crest character 224E is arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. The position in the front-rear direction of the family crest member 224E is the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest character 224E has a circular flat plate on which a family crest pattern is written. The family crest member 224E has a full color LED and can emit light in a plurality of colors. A pre-reading notice or a notice of the change may be given by a full color LED. In the state shown in FIG. 34A, the crest character 224E emits light in blue (indicated by right-up hatching in FIGS. 34 to 48). The family crest member 224E may include a liquid crystal display device, a display device including a transparent light guide plate, and the like.

  The family crest member 224E is driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and can move in the vertical direction in a plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen. In the state shown in FIG. 34A, the crest character 224E is located at the initial position.

  The drive control (movement control) of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the shogun character 224Fb, and the family crest character 224E may be executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 4 or executed by the first sub-control unit 400. Also good. The light emission control of the LEDs provided in the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb, and the family crest character 224E may be executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. May be.

  In FIG. 34 (a) and the subsequent drawings, the configuration necessary for explanation is extracted from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in the region on the paper surface separated by the one-dot chain line. As shown in FIG. 34 (a) and the subsequent figures, the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left part of the figure, and the chance button 136 and the second chance button 137 are schematically shown in the lower left part of the figure. The fourth symbol pd4 is schematically shown in the upper right part of the figure. A predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The second chance button 137 is an operation means that can be operated by a player disposed on the front side of the front frame door 106. The fourth symbol pd4 is a lamp for informing the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. The 4th symbol pd4 has a notifying part having a square external shape, and notifies the 4th symbol for the special figure 1. Moreover, the 4th symbol pd4 has the notification part of a circular external appearance shape, and alert | reports the 4th symbol for special figure 2. FIG. The square-shaped notifying unit of the fourth symbol pd4 blinks white when the special figure 1 variable game is executed, and turns off when the special figure 1 variable game is not executed. Similarly, the circular notification unit of the 4th symbol pd4 blinks when the special figure 2 variable game is executed, and turns off when the special figure 2 variable game is not executed. The fourth symbol may be displayed on a display device such as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Note that the display positions, sizes, and display numbers of the various displays described with reference to FIG. 34 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb overlap with the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 or the second symbol A plurality of five symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 1 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34A to 34Z are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 34A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” in the case of detachment is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special fig. "Is stopped (confirmed display, final stop display). Further, the fifth symbol of the “7-7-1” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The frame display surrounding each decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is displayed in red, and a pre-reading notice for the red chance is executed. During the execution of the pre-reading advance notice of the chance, a character string image of “Stop the same color pattern ...” is displayed on the tutorial display ts, suggesting that the pre-reading advance notice of the chance is being executed. In this example, the target of the pre-reading notice for the chance is the hold 2 in FIG. Note that when the decorative symbol variation display is stopped, the character string image “Stop the same color ...” and other character string images are displayed on the tutorial display ts, so that the pre-reading notice is performed. There may be.

  At the time shown in FIG. 34 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the first hold icon h1 and the second hold are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The icon h2 is displayed, the hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0” on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The mode of the 1 hold icon h1 and the 2nd hold icon h2 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon c1 is displayed in the variation icon display area. The aspect of the fluctuation icon c1 is a white circle.

  The castle town stage is set as the stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N display a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage. In the information display section ST1 below the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character string image of “castle town” is displayed, and the current stage name is informed.

  FIG. 34B shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c1 is erased is being executed. The fluctuation icon c1 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the fluctuation icon display area, and is displayed overlapping the stage cs. The fluctuation icon c1 is erased in such a manner that it moves downward and moves out of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The variation icon erasing animation in this example is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped. The variation icon erasing animation may be started during the variation display of the decorative symbol and may end during the variation display of the decoration symbol, or after the variation display of the decoration symbol is terminated, You may finish in.

  FIG. 34 (c) shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c1 is deleted. The variation icon c1 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 34B, and the lower half of the variation icon c1 is erased from the screen.

  FIG. 34 (d) shows a state where the variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c1 is deleted is completed. The variation icon c1 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 34B, and the entire variation icon c1 (entire) is erased from the screen. The completion of the deletion of the variation icon c1 is the end of the variation icon deletion animation.

  In FIG. 34 (e), in response to the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. In FIG. 34 (e) and the drawings to be described later, the downward white arrows shown in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are decorated at a speed that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbols. This represents a state in which the symbol variation display is displayed. Further, in FIG. 34 (e), with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the first hold icon h1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The second hold icon h2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area indicates the state immediately before the movement icon c2 and starts moving to the stage cs of the change icon display area. A state immediately before starting to move to the first area of the display area is shown. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a character string image of “chance on hold change” is displayed on the tutorial display ts.

  FIG. 34 (f) shows a state where the hold icon reduction animation is being executed. Each arrow in the figure represents the locus of the fluctuation icon c2 and the locus of the hold icon c2. At the time shown in FIG. 34 (g), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon c2 and the hold icon h2 is completed. Also, in FIG. 34 (g) and later-described drawings, a long downward white arrow shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L indicates a speed at which the player cannot recognize the decorative symbols. This represents the state where the variable display is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display is initially displayed as a low-speed variation display, and is displayed as a high-speed variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may be changed to a high-speed variation display when the movement of the variation icon and the hold icon is completed. Note that the size of the variation icon may change during movement of the variation icon, or may change so that the size of the variation icon increases after the movement of the variation icon is completed.

FIG. 34 (h) shows a state immediately before the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a when the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow. In FIG. 34 (h) and the drawings to be described later, the downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L indicate a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbols. Represents that.

FIG. 34 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 7” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In FIG. 34 (i) and the drawings to be described later, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the decorative symbol represent a temporarily stopped state of the decorative symbol in which the decorative symbol is slightly shaken up and down. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 34 (j) shows a state immediately before the variable display speed in the right symbol display area 208c is further reduced and “decoration 6” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 34 (k) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. Further, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the speed of the variable display is further slowed, and the state immediately before the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 34 (l) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 34 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 34 (n) shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 34 (o) shows a state in which a variation icon deletion animation is performed in which the variation icon c2 is deleted. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 34 (n), and the lower part of the fluctuation icon c2 is erased from the screen. In addition, in the effect display area 208d during the execution of the variable icon erasing animation, the main character Tono-sama character and the notice display y1 on which the character string image of “chance!” Is displayed are displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. ing. The notice display y1 is used as a prefetch notice of the next change. The notice display y1 may be displayed so as to overlap with any display other than the fourth symbol and the fifth symbol (except for the error display). For example, the notice display y1 may be displayed overlapping with a display of a hold icon, a change icon, a tutorial display, or the like. Further, the notice display y1 may be displayed so as to be overlapped with any display. The notice display y1 may be displayed before the decorative symbol variation display is stopped, displayed at the same time as the decorative symbol variation display stop display, or simultaneously with the start of the variation icon erasing animation. The display may start, the display may start simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation icon erasing animation, the display may start simultaneously with the start of the next decoration pattern change, or immediately after the start of the next decoration pattern change start. Display may be started. The same applies to the notice display described below.

  FIG. 34 (p) shows a state in which a variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is being executed. The variation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 34 (o), and the lower half of the variation icon c2 is erased from the screen. Further, the notice display y1 is deleted in the effect display area 208d. The notice display y1 may continue to be displayed until the variation icon erasing animation ends, or may continue to be displayed until after the variation icon erasing animation ends and the next special figure 1 variation game is started. . The big hit reliability may be different depending on the time when the notice display y1 is displayed. For example, the time for displaying the notice display y1 may be lengthened when a notice with a high hit reliability is performed, or the time for displaying the notice display y1 may be shortened when a notice with a high hit reliability is performed. .

  FIG. 34 (q) shows a state where the variation icon erasing animation for erasing the variation icon c2 is completed. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 34 (p), and the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted.

  In FIG. 34 (r), when the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative pattern variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. In addition, in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a decorative symbol variation display is displayed.

  FIG. 34 (s) shows a state where the hold icon reduction animation is being executed. At the time shown in FIG. 34 (t), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon c3 is completed. FIG. 34 (t) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display speed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is high.

FIG. 34 (u) shows a state immediately before the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a when the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow.

FIG. 34 (v) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 7” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208a. Moreover, the speed of the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c is slow, and a state immediately before “decoration 7” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

  FIG. 34 (w) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. With the temporary stop display of “decoration 7”, reach effect display in which “decoration 7” is displayed in the variation display of the ornament symbol is started. In addition, a sound effect for informing the start of reach is output from the speaker 120 at the start of reach effect display.

  FIG. 34 (x) shows a state in which “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” may be displayed after the end of the predetermined SP reach effect, or may be displayed without performing the SP reach effect. Also good.

  FIG. 34 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit ("Special Figure A"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a big hit symbol form, indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is stopped and displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-7-7” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, the square notification part of the fourth symbol pd4 is turned on in a big hit light emission mode.

  In this production example, the pre-reading notice for the next change is performed by starting to display the notice display y1 while the decorative symbol is stopped. Also, the big hit reliability may vary depending on the size, display color, character string image, character, etc. of the notice display y1. In addition, the big hit may be surely displayed by the next variation in which the notice display y1 is displayed at the timing of the present production example or any variation that is suspended. The notice display y1 may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol. It may be displayed across the display device 208N, or may be displayed on a fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Next, an effect example of effect pattern 2 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 35A to 35F are diagrams showing modification examples of the production shown in FIGS. 34N to 34Q in time series. Note that the effects performed before FIG. 35 (a) and after FIG. 35 (f) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 35A shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 35B shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. Also, in the notice display y1 shown in FIG. 34 (o), the notice display y1 ′ in which the character string “chance !!” is not displayed slides upward from the lower part of the screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state is displayed as follows. The notice display y1 'is displayed so as to overlap a part of the deletion icon c2, the hold icon h2, and the tutorial display ts being deleted displayed on the hold frame UI.

  FIG. 35 (c) shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. Further, the notice display y1 'is displayed so as to slide further upward from the state shown in FIG. The notice display y1 ′ is overlapped with the part of the deleted change icon c2, the hold icon h2, the tutorial display ts displayed on the hold frame UI, and part of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”. It is displayed.

  FIG. 35 (d) shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed downward, and about 3/4 of the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted from the screen. Further, the notice display y1 'is displayed so as to slide further upward from the state shown in FIG. 35 (c). Further, the notice display y1 'is moved and displayed upward, so that the entire hold icon h2 and all the character string images of "chance on hold change chance" displayed on the tutorial display ts are visible.

  FIG. 35 (e) shows a state where the variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is completed. The variation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 35D, and the variation icon c2 is deleted. Further, the notice display y1 'is stopped and displayed after being displayed so as to slide further upward from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 35 (e) shows a state in which the notice display y1 in which the character string image of “chance !!” is displayed on the notice display y1 ′ is stopped. Further, the notice display y1 'moves upward and the notice display y1 is stopped and displayed so that the entire area of the holding frame UI is visible. The jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the character string image displayed in the notice display y1 '.

  FIG. 35 (f) shows a state immediately before the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Further, the notice display y1 is deleted in the effect display area 208d. The notice display y1 may continue to be displayed until the variation icon erasing animation ends, or may continue to be displayed until after the variation icon erasing animation ends and the next special figure 1 variation game is started. . The big hit reliability may be different depending on the time when the notice display y1 is displayed. For example, the time for displaying the notice display y1 may be lengthened when a notice with a high hit reliability is performed, or the time for displaying the notice display y1 may be shortened when a notice with a high hit reliability is performed. .

  In this effect example, the pre-reading notice for the next change is performed by starting the moving display of the notice display y1 'during the stop display of the decorative symbol. When the movement display of the notice display y1 'is started at the timing of this production example, the big hit may be surely displayed with the next change or any of the held changes. Further, the notice display y1 'may be erased from the upper part of the screen without being stopped. In this case, the notice display y1 'may be used as a look-ahead notice with a low jackpot reliability, or may be used as a look-ahead notice with a high jackpot reliability, compared to the case where the notice display y1' is stopped and displayed. The notice display y1 ′ may be moved and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The display may be moved across the decorative symbol display device 208N, or may be displayed on a fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 3 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 35 (g) to (j) are diagrams showing a modification of the production shown in FIGS. 34 (n) to (q) in time series. The effects performed before FIG. 35 (g) and after FIG. 35 (j) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 35 (g) shows a state where a variation icon deletion animation is executed in which the variation icon c2 is deleted. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 35 (h) shows a state in which a variation icon deletion animation is executed in which the variation icon c2 is deleted. In addition, a notice image y2 in which a character string image of “chance !?” is displayed and the inside of the frame is displayed in green (indicated by cross-hatching in FIGS. 34 to 39) is reserved at the bottom of the screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed over the entire area of the frame UI, and is displayed so as to overlap the change icon c2, the hold icon h2, and the tutorial display ts that are being deleted.

  FIG. 35 (i) shows a state in which a variation icon deletion animation is executed in which the variation icon c2 is deleted. In addition, since the notice display y2 is erased, the entire area of the holding frame UI is visible. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed downward, and about half of the fluctuation icon c2 is erased from the screen. The notice display y2 may continue to be displayed until the variation icon erasing animation ends, or may continue to be displayed until after the variation icon erasing animation ends and the next special figure 1 variable game is started. . The big hit reliability may differ depending on the time when the notice display y2 is displayed. For example, the time for displaying the notice display y2 may be lengthened when a notice with a high hit reliability is performed, or the time for displaying the notice display y2 may be shortened when a notice with a high hit reliability is performed. .

  FIG. 35 (j) shows a state where the variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is completed. FIG. 35 (j) shows the state immediately before the variation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 35 (i), the variation icon c2 is erased, and the next special figure 1 variation game is started. Show.

  In this production example, the display of the notice display y2 is started during the stop display of the decorative symbol, so that the pre-reading notice for the next change is performed. When the display of the notice display y2 is started at the timing of this production example, the big hit may be surely displayed by the next change or any change that is put on hold. Since the notice display y2 is displayed, all the displays displayed on the hold frame UI are not visible. The big hit reliability may be made different by changing the size and display color of the notice display y2. The notice display y2 may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol. It may be displayed across the display device 208N, or may be displayed on a fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 4 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIGS. 35 (k) to (s). This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 35 (k) to 35 (s) are diagrams showing a modification of the production shown in FIGS. 34 (n) to (t) in time series. The effects performed before FIG. 35 (k) and after FIG. 35 (s) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 35 (k) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 35 (l) shows a state in which a variation icon deletion animation is executed in which the variation icon c2 is deleted. In addition, the notice display y3 of the princess character is started to be displayed at the center of the screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 35 (m) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted.

  FIG. 35 (n) shows a state where the variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is completed. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 35 (m), and the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. FIG. 35 (o) shows a state immediately before the next special figure 1 variable game is started.

  FIG. 35 (p) shows a state in which the decorative display variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started in accordance with the start of the next special figure 1 variation game. In addition, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the notice display y3 of the princess character is continuously displayed across the variation.

  FIG. 35 (q) shows a state where the hold icon reduction animation is being executed. At the time shown in FIG. 35 (r), the on-hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon c3 is completed. FIG. 35 (r) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display speed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is high.

  FIG. 35 (s) shows that a display in which the facial expression and posture of the princess character displayed at the center of the screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed is performed, and that the jackpot probability of the change is high in the information display unit ST1. The character string image of “Gekiatsu yo !!” suggesting is displayed.

  In this production example, the display of the notice display y3 is started during the stop display of the decorative symbol, so that a pre-reading notice for the next change is performed. When the display of the notice display y3 is started at the timing of this production example, the big hit may be surely displayed by the next change or any change that is put on hold. Further, the notice display y3 is continuously displayed until the change of the object of the prefetch notice, and is displayed as the notice of the change when the special figure changing game of the object of the prefetch notice is performed. In addition, the notice display y3 may vary the big hit reliability by changing the displayed character. For example, when a spear character is displayed as the notice display y3, the big hit reliability may be lower than when a princess character is displayed as the notice display y3. Further, by changing the character of the notice display y3, continuous notice or pseudo-continuous notice may be performed. The timing at which the character of the notice display y3 is changed may be every time the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol may be changed. The notice display y3 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol. It may be displayed across the display device 208N, or may be displayed on a fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Next, an effect example of effect pattern 5 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 36A to 36F are diagrams showing modification examples of the production shown in FIGS. 34N to 34R in time series. The effects performed before FIG. 36 (a) and after FIG. 36 (f) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 36A shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 36B shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. Further, the inside of the tutorial display ts frame displayed on the hold frame UI changes to green, and the character string image of “chance by hold change” has changed to a character string image of “next time! . In this example, prefetching is performed by displaying the tutorial display ts. Further, by displaying the tutorial display ts used for the pre-reading notice in the vicinity of the variable icon display area, it may be possible to make it easier for a player who is paying attention to the changing icon to notice that the pre-reading notice has been performed.

  FIG. 36C shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed downward, and about half of the fluctuation icon c2 is erased from the screen.

  FIG. 36D shows a state where the variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is completed. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 36D, and the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. In addition, the pre-reading notice by the display of the tutorial display ts is continuously performed. Note that the pre-reading notice by displaying the tutorial display ts may end before the changing icon erasing animation ends, or the pre-reading notice by displaying the tutorial display ts may end simultaneously with the end of the changing icon erasing animation.

  FIG. 36 (e) shows a state immediately before the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Further, the pre-reading notice by the display of the tutorial display ts is finished, and the display of the tutorial display ts is returned to the state shown in FIG. Note that the display of the tutorial display ts does not have to return to the state shown in FIG. 36A at this timing, and the display of the pre-reading notice is continuously displayed even in the next change, so that the tutorial display ts is displayed. The display may be used as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 36 (f) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation of the fourth symbol, and the variation of the fifth symbol are started in accordance with the start of the next special figure 1 variable game.

  In this production example, the display of the tutorial display ts is changed as a notice display during the stop display of the decorative symbol, thereby performing a pre-read notice for the next change. If the display of the tutorial display ts is changed at the timing of the present production example, the big hit may be surely displayed with the next change or any one of the held changes. The jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the display color of the tutorial display ts and the displayed character string image. The tutorial display ts may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol. It may be displayed across the display device 208N, or may be displayed on a fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Next, an effect example of effect pattern 6 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 36 (g) to (l) are diagrams showing modification examples of the production shown in FIGS. 34 (n) to (q) in time series. The effects performed before FIG. 36 (g) and after FIG. 36 (l) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 36 (g) shows a state in which a variation icon deletion animation is executed in which the variation icon c2 is deleted. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 36 (h) shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. In addition, the notice display y4 in which the character string image of “change! ????” is displayed and the inside of the frame is displayed in green overlaps the entire holding frame UI at the bottom of the screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed and overlaps with the change icon c2, the hold icon h2, the tutorial display ts, and the like that are being deleted.

  FIG. 36 (i) shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. In addition, since the notice display y4 is deleted, the entire holding frame UI can be visually recognized. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed downward, and about half of the fluctuation icon c2 is erased from the screen. Note that the notice display y4 may continue to be displayed until the variation icon erasing animation ends, or may continue to be displayed after the variation icon erasing animation ends and the next special figure 1 variation game is started. .

  FIG. 36 (j) shows a state where the variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is completed. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 36 (i), and the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted.

  FIG. 36 (k) shows a state in which an effect image that suggests that the hold icon changes to the pre-reading notice mode is displayed overlapping the second hold icon h2 before the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Is shown. Note that the second hold icon h2 may be changed to the prefetch notice mode simultaneously with the deletion of the notice display y4.

  FIG. 36 (l) shows a state in which the second hold icon h2 has changed to a green circular pre-reading notice mode before the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Note that the change icon c3 may be changed to a green circular notice mode in the hold icon reduction animation in the next change.

  In this production example, the display of the notice display y4 is started during the stop display of the decorative symbol, thereby suggesting or giving a notice that the hold icon will change. Since the notice display y4 is displayed, all the displays displayed on the hold frame UI are not visible. The reliability of the change of the hold icon may be changed by changing the size and display color of the notice display y4. For example, when the notice display y4 is displayed in green rather than being displayed in blue, the probability that the hold icon changes may be increased, or the hold icon is changed to a prefetch notice mode with high hitting reliability. It may be easy to do. The notice display y4 may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol. It may be displayed across the display device 208N, or may be displayed on a fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the notice display y4 may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In this case, the big hit reliability may be made different by changing the size and display color of the notice display y4.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 7 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 36 (m) to (p) are diagrams showing modification examples of the production shown in FIGS. 34 (n) to (r) in time series. Note that the effects performed before FIG. 36 (m) and after FIG. 36 (p) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 36 (m) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 36 (n) shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. In addition, the notice image y5 in which the character string image of “CR Yoshimune” is displayed and the inside of the frame is displayed in green is displayed so as to overlap the entire effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the background image of the castle town is not visible. Further, the castle town background displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is deleted.

  FIG. 36 (o) shows a state where the variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is completed. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 36 (i), and the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted.

  FIG. 36 (p) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the change display of the fourth symbol is started. In addition, the effect stage is changed, and the background image of the wilderness is started to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In this production example, the display of the notice display y5 is started during the stop display of the decorative design, thereby suggesting or giving a notice that the stage will change. By displaying the notice display y5, all the displays displayed in the effect display area 208d are not visible. When displaying the fourth symbol, the fifth symbol, and the numerical value display of the number of holds in the effect area 208d, the notice display y5 is displayed so as not to overlap these displays. Further, the reliability of changing the stage may be changed by changing the size and display color of the notice display y5. For example, when the notice display y5 is displayed in green rather than displaying in blue, the probability that the stage will be changed may be increased, or it may be easier to change to a stage with high hit reliability. Also good. The notice display y5 may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol. It may be displayed across the display device 208N, or may be displayed on a fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the notice display y5 may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In this case, the big hit reliability may be made different by changing the size and display color of the notice display y5.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 8 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 37A to 37D are diagrams showing a modification of the production shown in FIGS. 34N to 34Q in chronological order. The effects performed before FIG. 37 (a) and after FIG. 37 (d) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 37 (a) shows a state in which a variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is being executed. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 37 (b) shows a state in which a variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is being executed. In addition, a notice display y6 by an effect is displayed on the fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice display y6 overlaps with a part of the decorative design as viewed from the front. The notice display y6 is used as a look-ahead notice for the next change.

  FIG. 37 (c) shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. Further, the notice display y6 is displayed in a light emitting manner so as to further expand. The notice display y6 overlaps a part of the change icon c2 being deleted, the second hold icon h2, and the tutorial display ts.

  FIG. 37 (d) shows a state immediately before the next special figure 1 variable game is started after the change icon deletion animation in which the change icon c2 is deleted. The fluctuation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 37C, and the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. In addition, the notice display y6 is erased in the fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the notice display y6 may be deleted during the execution of the variation icon deletion animation, may be deleted after the end of the variation icon deletion animation, or may be deleted after the next variation starts.

  In this effect example, the pre-reading notice is performed by emitting and displaying the notice display 6 on the fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative design display device 208L during the stop display of the decorative design. Note that when the 4th and 5th symbols are displayed in the effect display area 208d, the notice display y6 is displayed in a light emitting manner so as not to overlap the 4th and 5th symbols. Further, the big hit reliability may be made different by changing the size of the notice display y6 and the emission color. For example, the big hit reliability may be increased in the case where the notice display y6 is light-emitting and displayed in red rather than the light-emitting display in blue. The notice display y6 may be displayed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the second decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed across the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The notice display y6 may be used as a notice of the change.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 9 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of production pattern 1, and FIGS. 37 (e) to (i) are diagrams showing modification examples of the production shown in FIGS. 34 (n) to (q) in time series. The effects performed before FIG. 37 (e) and after FIG. 37 (i) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 37 (e) shows a state in which a variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is being executed. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 37 (f) shows a state where a variation icon deletion animation is executed in which the variation icon c <b> 2 is deleted. Further, the family crest member 224E is moved upward. When the family crest member 224E moves upward, it overlaps the fluctuation icon c2 being erased. In addition, the family crest member 224E moves upward to perform a pre-reading notice for the next change. The upward movement of the family crest character 224E may be started before the start of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, may be started simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, or simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation. It may be started or may be started after the end of the variable icon deletion animation.

  FIG. 37 (g) shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. Further, the family crest member 224E is moved upward. When the family crest member 224E moves upward, it overlaps with the changing icon c2 and the second hold icon h2 being erased.

  FIG. 37 (h) shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. Also, the family crest member 224E moves downward. The downward movement of the family crest character 224E may be started during the execution of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, may be started simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, or after the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation. It may be started, or may be started after starting the next variation.

  FIG. 37 (i) shows a state where the variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is finished. Further, the family crest member 224E moves downward and returns to the initial position. The timing at which the crest character 224E returns to the initial position may be during the execution of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, at the same time as the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, or after the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation. Or after starting the next fluctuation.

  In this effect example, the pre-reading notice is performed by moving the family crest actor 224E while the decorative symbol is stopped. In addition, the pre-reading notice may be performed by moving an object other than the family crest object 224E (for example, an 8th generation object 224Fa or a general object 224Fb). Also, the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the role or movement to be moved. Further, the pre-reading notice may be performed by moving the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The movement of the family crest member 224E may be used as a notice of the change.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 10 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 37 (j) to (o) are diagrams showing modification examples of the production shown in FIGS. 34 (n) to (q) in time series. The effects performed before FIG. 37 (j) and after FIG. 37 (o) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 37 (j) shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the character of Tono, a character string image of “Yoshimune Lv3”, and a meter notice display y7. The meter of the notice display y7 increases to about ½ when the full tank is 1. “Yoshimune” is a character name, and “Lv3” represents a player's level in a predetermined member service. The predetermined member service is a member service for registering a member and accessing the Web server through the Internet line. By accumulating experience values, the level (lv) is increased, and various benefits are provided according to the level. It is a service that can be acquired. In this example, since the level of the predetermined member service is Lv3, the character of Tono is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The character of Tono, the character string image of “Yoshimune Lv3”, and the meter notice display y7 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 37 (e) may be displayed all the time, or the decorative symbol is stopped. It may be displayed only during display. Further, the character of Tono, the character string image of “Yoshimune Lv3” and the meter notice display y7 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be linked to the level in a predetermined member service.

  FIG. 37 (k) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted.

  FIG. 37 (l) shows a state where a variation icon deletion animation is executed in which the variation icon c2 is deleted.

  FIG. 37 (m) shows a state where the variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is finished. Simultaneously with the end of the changing icon erasing animation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts an animation in which the meter of the notice display y7 increases. The animation in which the meter of the notice display y7 increases may be started during the execution of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, may be started after the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, or started after the next fluctuation starts. May be.

  FIG. 37 (n) shows a state before the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an animation in which the meter of the notice display y7 increases is executed. The character image of “UP !!” is displayed under the character of Tono instead of the character image of “Yoshimune Lv3”, and the meter of the notice display y7 increases from about 1/2 to about 5/6. Yes. You may alert | report so that jackpot reliability may become so high that the meter value of the notice display y7 is high. Further, when the meter of the notice display y7 becomes full, the level of a predetermined member service of the player may be raised, and various privileges by the predetermined member service may be given to the player.

  FIG. 37 (o) shows a state before the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character string image of “Yoshimune Lv3” is displayed instead of the character string image of “UP !!” under the character of Tono.

  In this effect example, an animation for increasing the meter of the notice display y7 is executed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M while the decorative symbol is stopped. A pre-reading notice may be given by an animation that increases the meter of the notice display y7, or a notice of the change may be given.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 11 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 (p) to 37 (t). This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 37 (p) to (t) are diagrams showing the modification of the production example shown in FIGS. 34 (n) to (q) in time series. Note that the effects performed before FIG. 37 (p) and after FIG. 37 (t) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 37 (p) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs. In addition, a meter notice display y8 is displayed above the left symbol display area 208a. The meter notice display y8 has the same configuration as the meter display shown in FIG.

  FIG. 37 (q) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted.

  FIG. 37 (r) shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. Further, the meter rising item UpI is displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon c2 and the stage cs being erased. The meter rising item UpI has the same configuration as the meter rising item UpI shown in FIG.

  FIG. 37 (s) shows a state where the variation icon deletion animation in which the variation icon c2 is deleted is finished. In addition, an animation in which the meter rising item UpI moves toward the left end portion of the meter of the notice display y8 is started simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation icon erasing animation. The animation in which the meter rising item UpI moves may be started during the execution of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, may be started after the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation, or may be started after the start of the next fluctuation. May be.

  FIG. 37 (t) shows a state before the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Moreover, the meter of the notice display y8 is increased by one scale by the meter rising item UpI. The jackpot reliability may be notified in proportion to the amount stored in the meter of the notice display y8. In addition, when the meter of the notice display y8 becomes full, the SP reach effect may be always performed in the next change.

  In this production example, the pre-reading notice is performed by increasing the meter of the notice display y8 during the stop display of the decorative symbol. Further, the meter rising item UpI is used as an effect of increasing the meter of the notice display y8, but a pre-reading notice or a notice of the change may be given by the meter raising item UpI. Further, a notice of the change may be given by a notice display y8.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 12 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 38A to 38M are diagrams showing modification examples of the production shown in FIGS. 34N to 34T in time series. The effects performed before FIG. 38 (a) and after FIG. 38 (m) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 38A shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 38B shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. In addition, a notice display y9 made up of a plurality of Sabohani characters starts to be displayed on the left side of the screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this example, a large group of sabotani characters (hereinafter referred to as “Hani group”) moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N from left to right. Is used as the notice display y9, and FIG. 38B shows a state in which the honey group is waiting. The effect that the group of honey moves from left to right is used as a notice of the change with high jackpot reliability.

  FIG. 38C shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed.

  FIG. 38D shows a state where the variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is completed. The variation icon c2 is moved and displayed below the state shown in FIG. 38C, and indicates the state where the variation icon c2 is deleted.

  FIG. 38 (e) shows a state in which the decorative display variation display, the fourth design variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started in accordance with the start of the next special figure 1 variation game. In addition, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the notice display y9 of the first row of the honey group is continuously displayed across the variation.

  FIG. 38F shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is being executed. At the time shown in FIG. 38 (g), the on-hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon c3 is completed. Simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the fluctuation icon c3, the honey group notice that the honey group moves from the left to the right is started. FIG. 38 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display speed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is high.

  FIG. 38 (h) shows a state in which an animation in which the honey group moves from left to right is executed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The honey group is displayed so as not to overlap the fifth pattern pd5.

  FIG. 38 (i) shows a state in which an animation in which the honey group moves from left to right is continuously executed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The honey group is displayed so as not to overlap the fluctuation icon. In addition, the honey group may be displayed so as to overlap the variation icon, may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design, or may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. .

  FIG. 38 (j) shows a state in which the animation in which the honey group moves from left to right is continuously executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L. The honey group is displayed so as not to overlap the tutorial display ts. The head of the honey group is located on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the tail of the honey group is located on the left side of the effect display region 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . The honey group may be displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display ts.

  FIG. 38 (k) shows a state in which an animation in which the honey group moves from left to right is continuously executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the honey group is displayed so as not to overlap the numerical value display hn of the number of holds, and is displayed so as to overlap the display of the character cd and the display stage ss. The honey group may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the character cd or the display stage ss.

  FIG. 38 (l) shows a state immediately before the animation in which the honey group moves from left to right in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tail of the honey group is displayed at the right end of the display area of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 38 (m) shows a state in which the animation in which the honey group moves from the left to the right on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is finished, and the honey group notice is finished.

  In this production example, the display of the notice display y9 is started during the stop display of the decorative symbol, thereby suggesting or giving a notice that a honey group notice having a high jackpot reliability will be performed in the next change. When the display of the notice display y9 is started at the timing of this production example, the big hit may be surely displayed by the next change or any change that is put on hold. In addition, the notice display y9 may be continuously displayed across a plurality of changes until the change of the target for which the honey group notice is performed, and when the notice display y9 is displayed, the honey group notice is always performed. It may be configured, and even if the notice display y9 is displayed, the honey group notice may not be performed.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 13 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 39A to 39K are diagrams showing modification examples of the production shown in FIGS. 34N to 34T in time series. Note that the effects performed before FIG. 39 (a) and after FIG. 39 (k) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 39A shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted. The variation icon c2 moves below the upper end surface of the stage cs in the variation icon display area, and is displayed so as to overlap the stage cs.

  FIG. 39B shows a state in which a variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased is being executed. In the effect pattern 8, the notice display y6 is displayed at this timing, but in this effect example, the notice display y6 is not displayed at this timing.

  FIG. 39 (c) shows a state in which a fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed in which the fluctuation icon c2 is deleted.

  FIG. 39 (d) shows a state just before the variation icon erasing animation in which the variation icon c2 is erased ends and the next special figure 1 variation game starts.

  FIG. 39 (e) shows a state in which the decorative display variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started in accordance with the start of the next special figure 1 variation game. In addition, since it is immediately after the decorative symbol variation display is started, the previous variation stop symbol “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” fluctuates. FIG. 39 (e) may be a variation standby state before the decorative symbol variation display is started. In addition, the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started.

  FIG. 39 (f) shows a fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L in a state where the previous variation stop symbol “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” fluctuates. Fig. 8 shows a state in which the notice display y6 by the effect is emitted.

  FIG. 39 (g) shows a state in which the notice display y6 is lit and displayed so as to be further enlarged in a state where the previous change stop pattern “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” fluctuates and fluctuates. .

  FIG. 39 (h) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed at such a speed that the player can recognize the decorative symbol. Further, the notice display y6 is continuously displayed on the fourth display device.

  FIG. 39 (i) shows a state immediately before executing the hold icon reduction animation. In addition, the flashing display of the notice display y6 is erased before executing the hold icon reduction animation.

  FIG. 39 (j) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is being executed, and FIG. 39 (k) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation has ended.

  In this production example, the notice display 6 is displayed on the fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol at the start of the special figure 1 variable game or during fluctuation fluctuation. The change is notified in advance by displaying the light. The notice display 6 is displayed on the fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol at the start of the special figure 1 variable game or during the fluctuation of shaking. A pre-reading notice may be made. In addition, this effect example is a modification in which the light emission display of the notice display 6 is started at a timing different from the effect example shown in the effect pattern 8 described above, and the display of the notice display used in the other effect patterns described above is started. And the timing of the start of the operation of the accessory may be applied to this production example. Moreover, you may use the 4th display apparatus provided in the front side of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L for the preliminary announcement in the above-mentioned production patterns 1-12.

  Next, an effect example of the effect pattern 14 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. This production example is a modification of the production pattern 1, and FIGS. 39 (l) to (p) are diagrams showing modification examples of the production shown in FIGS. 34 (q) to (r) in time series. The effects performed before FIG. 39 (l) and after FIG. 39 (p) are the same as the effects shown in the effect pattern 1, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 39 (l) shows a state where the hold icon reduction animation is finished.

  FIG. 39 (m) shows a state before the pending icon reduction animation is finished and the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In addition, a state is shown in which a notice display y6 by an effect is emitted and displayed on the fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 39 (n) shows a state before the pending icon reduction animation is finished and the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Further, the notice display y6 is displayed in a light emitting manner so as to further expand.

  FIG. 39 (o) shows a state immediately before the pending icon reduction animation ends and the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Further, the light emission display of the notice display y6 is erased before the next special figure 1 variable game is started.

  FIG. 39 (p) shows a state where the variation display of the decorative symbols is started in accordance with the start of the next special figure 1 variable game.

  In this production example, the notice display 6 is displayed on the fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L after the decorative symbol is stopped and the variable icon erasing animation ends. A pre-reading notice is given. In addition, this effect example is a modified example in which the light emission display of the notice display 6 is started at a timing different from the effect examples shown in the effect patterns 8 and 13 described above, and the notice display used in the other effect patterns described above is used. You may apply the timing of a display start, and the timing of the operation start of an accessory to this production example.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, particularly the items described in the production patterns 1 to 14, can be combined. Moreover, the example of production demonstrated with the production patterns 1-14 can be performed also in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.1 and FIGS.16-33.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to the drawings again.
(C1)
Display means (for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, a fourth display device provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L). A playground,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation display”),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon (for example, a variation icon),
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon (for example, a hold icon),
The first icon is an icon related to the variation display during a certain variation (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”),
The second icon is an icon related to the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) performed after the first variation display,
One of the plural types of displays is a first display (for example, notice displays y1 to y9) (for example, see FIGS. 34 to 39),
After the stop display of the first variation display, the second icon is moved and displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 39D to 39K).
The first display is a display that may be displayed after the first icon is erased and before the moving display of the second icon ends (for example, FIG. 39D ) To (k))
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player may be able to focus attention on the effect at the end of the decorative symbol variation display or at the start of the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, when the player can have an expectation that the first display will be displayed at the timing when the first icon is deleted, and the timing at which the first display is displayed becomes easier to understand. There is.

(C2)
A gaming table according to C1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of pre-read notice display,
The first display is the prefetch notice display (for example, see FIG. 34 (o)),
A game stand characterized by that.

(C3)
A gaming machine according to C1 or C2,
The first display is a display that may be continuously displayed until after the start of the variation of the second variation display (for example, see FIG. 38).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C4)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C3,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a hold icon,
The display means is a means having a hold display area (for example, a hold frame UI) capable of displaying the hold icon,
It is configured to be able to display the number of suspensions of operation of the variable display by the number of the suspension icons,
The first display is a display that may overlap the hold display area (see, for example, FIG. 36 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C5)
A gaming table according to C4,
The first icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area,
The second icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(C6)
A gaming table according to C4 or C5,
The first display is a display that may overlap the hold icon (see, for example, FIG. 36 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C7)
A gaming table according to C6,
When the first display overlaps the hold icon, an effect display in which the hold icon changes may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 36 (h) to (l)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C8)
The game stand according to any one of C4 to C7,
When the first display (for example, the prefetch notice icon j) overlaps the hold display area continuously until the start of the change of the second change display, an effect display in which the hold icon changes is displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 17)
A game stand characterized by that.

(C9)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C6,
The display means includes a display area that can display a plurality of types of tutorial displays (hereinafter referred to as “tutorial display area (for example, display area of tutorial display ts)”).
The first display may be displayed in the tutorial display area (see, for example, FIG. 36B).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C10)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C6,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to a plurality of types of stages,
When the first display (for example, the notice display y5) is displayed when the first variation display is stopped, an effect display in which the stage changes may be displayed (for example, FIG. 36 (m ) To (p)),
A game stand characterized by that.

(C11)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C6,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
The first display is an effect display in which the meter of the meter display increases (see, for example, FIGS. 37 (p) to (t)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C12)
A gaming table according to C11,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of reach effect display,
When the meter of the first display is full, the reach effect display may be displayed after the start of the change of the second change display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(C13)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C12,
The display means is means capable of displaying an animation for erasing the first icon (hereinafter referred to as “erasing animation (for example, variable icon erasing animation)”).
In some cases, the display of the first display is started during the display of the erased animation (see, for example, FIG. 34 (o)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C14)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C12,
The display means is referred to as an animation for erasing the first icon (hereinafter referred to as “erasing animation, for example, changing icon erasing animation”). ) Can be displayed,
The display of the first display may start after the display of the erased animation (see, for example, FIG. 39 (m)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C15)
A gaming table according to C14,
With operating means,
The first display is a display related to the operation means (for example, see FIG. 31).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C16)
The game stand according to any one of C13 to C15,
The first display may be displayed when the first variation display is stopped and the erase animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 34 (o)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C17)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C16,
The first icon is configured to be erased in relation to the fluctuation stop of the first fluctuation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(C18)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C17,
It is configured so that the movement display of the second icon is performed after erasing the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(C19)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C18,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D1)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L),
One display means of the plurality of display means is provided on the front side of the second display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L). Display device or display means mounted on family crest member 224E),
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation display”),
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon (for example, a variation icon),
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon (for example, a hold icon),
The first icon is an icon related to the variation display during a certain variation (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”),
The second icon is an icon related to the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) performed after the first variation display,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of animation,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a certain display (for example, notice display y1 to y9) (for example, see FIGS. 34 to 39),
One of the plurality of types of animation is an animation for deleting the first icon (hereinafter referred to as “first animation (for example, variable icon deletion animation)”).
After the stop display of the first variation display, the second icon is moved and displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 39D to 39K).
The certain display is a display that may be displayed between the end of the first animation and the end of the moving display of the second icon (for example, FIGS. 39D to 39D). k)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, there is a case where the player can be focused on the effect performed by the second display means at the end of the decorative symbol variable display or at the start of the decorative symbol variable display. is there. In addition, the player can have an expectation that a certain display is displayed on the second display means at the timing when the first icon is erased. May be easier to understand.

(D2)
A gaming machine according to D1,
The second display means is a means having a display area smaller than the display area of the first display means,
The second display means is a liquid crystal display device.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D3)
A gaming machine according to D1 or D2,
The second display means is a means positioned in front of the first display means,
The second display means is a means having a display region capable of transmitting light emitted from the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D4)
A gaming table according to D3,
The second display means is configured to overlap the first animation (see, for example, FIG. 37C).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D5)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D4,
The second display means is a movable means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D6)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D5,
A movable body (for example, a family crest member 224E) is provided,
The second display means is means provided on the movable body,
The movable body moves during the display of the first animation, and the movable body overlaps the first animation (for example, see FIGS. 37F and 37G). ),
A game stand characterized by that.

(D7)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D6,
The second display means is means for not displaying the variation display (for example, see FIGS. 34 to 39).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D8)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D7,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of pre-read notice display,
The certain display is the prefetch notice display (see, for example, FIGS. 34 to 39).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D9)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D8,
The certain display (for example, the notice display y9) is a display that may be continuously displayed until the start of the variation of the second variation display (for example, see FIG. 38).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D10)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D9,
The certain display (for example, the notice display y9) is a display that may be displayed on the first display means (for example, see FIG. 38 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D11)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D10,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a hold icon,
The first display means is a means having a hold display area capable of displaying the hold icon,
It is configured to be able to display the number of suspensions of operation of the variable display by the number of the suspension icons,
The certain display is a display that may overlap the hold display area (see, for example, FIG. 37C).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D12)
A gaming machine according to D11,
The first icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area,
The second icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D13)
A gaming machine according to D11 or D12,
The certain display is a display that may overlap the hold icon (see, for example, FIG. 37C).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D14)
The game stand according to any one of D11 to D13,
The certain display may be started during the display of the first animation (see, for example, FIG. 37B).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D15)
The game stand according to any one of D11 to D13,
The display may be started after the first animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 39 (n)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D16)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D15,
The first animation is configured to be displayed during the period from when the first variation display is stopped to when the second variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D17)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D16,
The moving display of the second icon is performed after the display of the first animation is finished.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D18)
The game stand according to any one of D1 to D17,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the display color of the notice display is white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow from the lowest. In the symbol variation display that is the target of the rainbow-colored notice display, the big hit symbol mode may always be confirmed and displayed.

  Next, meter production will be described.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the meter effect in stages.

  FIG. 40 (1) shows the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  Further, a family crest member 224E (not shown in FIG. 3) is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest actor 224E shown in FIG. 40 (1) corresponds to the initial position. Note that the family crest character 224E and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N have a front-rear relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction), with the crest character 224E being the forefront and the first decorative symbol display device 208L being the most. On the rear side, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest character 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 40, it is executed in a variable display symbol (special drawing) executed on the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 1 and the like) and a second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 1 and the like), not shown. The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Also, a variable display symbol (ordinary symbol) executed in the ordinary symbol display device 210 (see FIG. 1 and the like) (not shown) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5C displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol representing the first symbol (not shown) with an enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. As described above, on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag is generated for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt process on the sub-control unit 400, 500 side. When the symbol pd3 also starts to be changed and the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. The following description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3. However, the same thing can be said even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

  In FIG. 40, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the general character 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display. The square display corresponds to FIG. 1 and the circle display corresponds to FIG. Whether it is a square display or a circle display, the gray display indicates that the stop symbol of the loss is being displayed in the special figure display device (212, 214), and the black display indicates the special figure display device. In (212, 214), the big hit stop symbol is being displayed, and the white display indicates that the symbol variation is being displayed in the special symbol display device (212, 214). This fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208M. It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. In addition, you may distinguish and display during change display and stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of a board surface. Further, on the upper part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, a mini decorative symbol obtained by reducing and displaying the third symbol pd3 is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display pattern of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The 5th symbol pd5 also performs a variable display and a stop display, and, like the 4th symbol pd4, plays a role of clearly indicating the variation display and the stop display of the 3rd symbol pd3. Accordingly, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed. The third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 correspond to decorative symbols in a broad sense.

  The state shown in FIG. 40 (1) is a stop display of combinations of decorative symbols for both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a gray square display and a gray circle display, and both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are being stopped.

  In addition, a hold frame UI is shown in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. The hold frame UI can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface that provides various information to the player. The hold frame UI has a variable icon display area in the center, a hold icon display area on the left side, and an effect display area on the right side. In the hold icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of balls to be held shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each stage. In addition, the stage corresponding to the number (for example, eight) which added the number of reservation balls of special figure 1 and the number of reservation balls of special figure 2 may be prepared. In the variation icon display area, a stage cs that is higher and larger than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area is prepared, and the variation icon is displayed on the stage cs. In addition, in the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 40 (1), a base icon UIb extending in the left and right directions with a vertical stripe pattern is provided, and the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the holding icon display area, The stage cs prepared in the variable icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side. In addition, a tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. This tutorial display ts can also be viewed as a tutorial icon overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side.

  In the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 40 (1), one hold icon h1 is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the current special figure is one. In other words, the hold icons are displayed for the number of reserved balls in the special figure, and the older the winning timing is, the closer to the center (right side) is displayed. A first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 40 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a red display mode, which is a display mode of a prefetch notice. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon. For each display mode, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold mode is provided. ). However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold is not necessarily a big hit, and there may be a loss. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. In addition, the timing when the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or the default display form and then changes to the pre-reading notice mode is as follows. The winning time can be given.

  In addition, on the stage cs in the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 40 (1), a variation icon c having a white display mode, which is a default display mode, is displayed. In FIG. 40 (1), as described above, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stopped and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as stopped. In FIG. 40 (1), the symbol is stopped. The change icon c is still left without disappearing. In FIG. 40 (2), the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears.

  In addition, a numerical display hn of the number of reservations is displayed in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 40 (1). The numerical value display hn of the number of holdings here indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “1” and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is “0”. Further, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as “mini character”) is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable state or not (so-called constant display), and is displayed across the variable display of the third symbol pd3 multiple times. The In the example shown in FIG. 40, the display of the character cd of the lord who becomes the main character is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the lord-like character cd shown in FIG. 40 (1) is the initial posture.

  In addition, an information display unit ST1 is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the left second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the name of the background stage is displayed on the information display unit ST1. Here, it is a castle town stage, “castle town” is displayed on the information display section ST1, and the streets of the castle town are displayed in common in the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The information display unit ST1 may display an effect mode, a current control state (for example, during probability change), a pre-reading notice, or a currently performed symbol. A notice (normal notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 40A, the speaker 120 is shown in the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operation means) is also shown in the lower left. A second chance button 137 (corresponding to the second operation means) is also shown on the right side of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be an OK button of the setting operation unit 137 shown in FIG. 1 or may be an operating means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

  Note that the display positions, sizes, and display numbers of various displays described with reference to FIG. 40 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb overlap with the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 or the second symbol A plurality of five symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the fluctuation icon c disappears, in FIG. 40 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. The symbol variation display based on the hold of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display is also started for the fifth symbol pd5. Note that the third symbol pd3 is a low-speed fluctuation because the fluctuation display has just started. A thick, short arrow with white outline represents a low-speed fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter). During low-speed fluctuations, it may be possible to recognize the changing symbols. Further, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 40 (2) moves to the stage cs in the fluctuation icon display area, and the red fluctuation icon c is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it has been a hold icon until then matches the display mode (red) of the icon after it has become a variable icon. The display mode of the variation icon represents the expectation degree (reliability) of the big hit in the symbol variation display being displayed. In other words, the normal notice is executed according to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. Even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display during display is not necessarily a big hit and may result in a loss. In FIG. 40 (3), the hold icon disappears, and the numerical value display hn of the number of holds displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side is “0” in both FIG. 1 and FIG. Further, in the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 40 (3), the display of the square corresponding to the special figure 1 is changed from gray to white, indicating that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. In FIG. 40 (3) where the symbol variation display is started, the display content of the tutorial display ts is not changed.

  The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 40 (4) fluctuates at high speed. White thin and long arrows represent high-speed fluctuations (hereinafter the same). When it becomes high-speed fluctuation, it becomes difficult to recognize the fluctuating symbol. In FIG. 40 (4), a meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, but the display position is not limited to this position. The display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the fluctuation icon c, but the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter display is not only when the third symbol pd3 becomes a high-speed fluctuation, but also when the symbol fluctuation starts, when the movement of the fluctuation icon c is completed, when a prize is awarded to the special figure starting port (when holding increases), At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect Alternatively, it is possible to enumerate when continuing (at the start of re-variation), when reaching a reach state, when starting a super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter display. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. When the meter display appears, the display contents of the tutorial display ts are changed to display contents related to the meter display. The meter display shown in FIG. 40 (4) has a white meter frame mf, and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. This white meter display MW corresponds to an example of a first meter display. The meter display includes an increase type, a decrease type, and an increase / decrease type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 40 is an increase type, is provided with five scales, and becomes full at the sixth stage. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 40 (4) is displayed in an empty state (the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

  In FIG. 40 (5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (6), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 40 (6), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in the same figure (7) following FIG. 40 (6), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. The meter rising item UpI corresponds to the first mini item or the first mini icon (hereinafter the same), and the display position of the meter rising item UpI is a decorative pattern that fluctuates (temporarily stops). Although the position overlaps from the front side, the display position is not limited to this position. Moreover, although the display size of the meter rising item UpI is smaller than the decorative design that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped), the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI is the first stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning (when holding increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain production, at the time of temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous production or continuation Time (at the start of re-variation), start of reach state, start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The meter raising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter. The meter rise item UpI shown in FIG. 40 (7) is white, but as will be described later, a plurality of types of meter rise items UpI are prepared, and the rate of increase of the meter differs depending on the type.

  In FIG. 40 (8), the moving animation of the meter ascending item UpI is started, and the meter ascending item UpI displayed at the position overlapping from the front side on the decorative pattern that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped) is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 40 (9), the change in the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one scale. The color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the meter frame mf (here, blue), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the meter increase timing is the second stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning a prize at the starting point (when holding increases), at the start of a pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to a pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain production, and at the pseudo-continuous production, When stopping or continuing (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the timing of meter increase. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  In FIG. 40 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts shaking fluctuation (second stop), and the second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter raising item UpI is a position overlapping the right symbol from which the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) has started from the front side. In FIG. 40 (11), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI is also moved from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 40 (12), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one scale again. As a result, the meter of the white meter display MW has been raised to the second scale.

  In FIG. 40 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 40 (14), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 40 (15), the cut-in display of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the main character, Tono-sama, appears, and the line “Still Still” is displayed, indicating that re-variation is likely to start. In FIG. 40 (16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”-“decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped is displayed again and temporarily stopped. A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so as to partially overlap the left pattern. In FIG. 40 (17), re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start high-speed variation. In FIG. 40 (18), the character display of “× 2”, which is the continuous count display, is reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 40 in stages.

  In FIG. 41 (19) continuing from FIG. 40 (18), while the three symbols of the third symbol pd3 continue to fluctuate at high speed, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left starts a notice that a mini item will appear. . That is, a treasure chest icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 41 (20), a closed treasure chest icon I1 is displayed on the information display section ST1. This treasure box icon I1 becomes a notice icon for the appearance of a mini item. In FIG. 41 (21), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and a meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box. Here, a white meter rising item UpI appears.

  It should be noted that the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 41 (20) is closed without disappearing, nothing appears even when opened, or an item different from the meter rising item UpI (for example, an item with a question mark) Or x-marked items or unfortunate character display items) may appear. In other words, even if the treasure box icon I1 is displayed, there may be a false notice as a notice that a mini item will appear.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 44 (22), the meter rising item UpI that moves is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it appears that the left half of the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs the part of the meter rising item UpI.

  In FIG. 41 (23), the meter rising item UpI is displayed so as to reach the white meter display MW and overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 41 (24), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW further increases by one scale, and the white meter display MW increases to the third scale.

  When the meter rising item UpI is displayed, the meter may always rise, but the meter may not rise. For example, the meter rising item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise even if it reaches.

  In FIG. 41 (25), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. The “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. In FIG. 41 (27), the change of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and in FIG. 28 (28), the symbol in the left that has fluctuated and fluctuated becomes the first decorative symbol display device. The right symbol that has moved to the upper left corner of 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (29), it has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N remain the background screen of the castle town, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still displays the display of the character cd on the display stage ss. Then, the information display unit ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the treasure chest icon I1 disappears.

  In addition, when it develops into a super reach production, the hold frame UI disappears and the tutorial display ts also disappears. Here, no hold icon remains, but if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, only the variation icon c corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is continuously displayed. However, the fluctuation icon c may also disappear together. Alternatively, when the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may be continued. Moreover, the display of the tutorial display ts may be continued, and further, the display of the hold frame UI may be continued.

  In FIG. 41 (30), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are switched to the wilderness background, the information display unit ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. The display of the display stage ss and the Tono-sama character cd disappears from the device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical value hn of the number of reservations is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (30), the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are displayed, and a duel scene of two people is started. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top here.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (31), the white meter display MW is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in FIG. 41 (31) is a state where the meter has accumulated up to three scales (corresponding to an example of the second state). In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. The meter is used from FIG. 41 (32) to FIG. 41 (33), and the white meter display MW decreases. In FIG. 33, the state is 0 (corresponding to an example of the first state). I'm back. In FIG. 41 (34), the white meter display MW that has been enlarged and returned to the 0 state disappears, and a green aura icon OI1 is added behind the main character's character. The color of the aura icon OI1 represents the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. For example, the green aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the blue aura icon, the red aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the green aura icon, and the golden aura icon has a rich hit The rainbow-colored aura icon that changes into seven colors has the highest expectation level for the jackpot, and corresponds to a level higher than the jackpot concentration (for example, the jackpot determination).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (35), a scene after the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. 36 (36), a scene in which the Tono-sama character was lost. Is displayed, and “decoration 3”, which is different from “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a medium symbol. Thereafter, the symbol variation display is finished, and the third symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is fixedly displayed on the first ornamental symbol display device 208L, and the second ornamental symbol display device is displayed. In 208M, the fifth symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. The super reach production here was a lost super reach production.

  The example shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW does not change from the empty state (the meter is 0) to the full state, and the big hit symbol is not finally displayed. Become.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is made.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 40 to 41 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  Similarly to the state shown in FIG. 40 (1), the state shown in FIG. 42 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”. Further, the first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 42 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a green display mode which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. The green display mode has a lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

  In FIG. 42 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears, in FIG. 42 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. The base symbol variation display is started. On the stage cs in the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 42 (3), a variation icon c having a green display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 42 (4), the white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 42 (4) is also an increase type, and the display is started in an empty state (a state where the meter is 0).

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 42 (5), the dialogue “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the Tono-sama character cd. The display of the line “Ikuzo” corresponds to a notice that a mini item will appear. In FIG. 42 (6), a change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 42 (7), the Tono-sama character cd throws the change ball icon cI, and the movement animation of the change ball icon cI is displayed. 42 (7), the changing ball icon cI has moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 42 (8), the changing ball icon cI is displayed as a white meter display MW. The white meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 42 (8) is changed, and an effect display ed1 is added. In FIG. 42 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. The effect in which the Tono-sama character cd continues to appear as shown in FIGS. 42 (6) to (8) corresponds to an example of a meter change effect. The red meter display MR corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. The red meter display MR has a higher rank than the white meter display MW (for example, the appearance rate is low), and the meter change effects shown in FIGS. 42 (6) to (8) are a kind of rank-up effects. It corresponds to. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 42 (9) is also empty (the meter is 0). Further, a sound effect for notifying the change of the meter display is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 42 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In addition, the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 42 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. In FIG. 42 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops, and fluctuation fluctuation starts (first stop). Similarly to FIG. 40 (7), the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. In FIG. 42 (13), as in FIG. 40 (8), the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the red meter display MR. In FIG. 42 (14), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by three graduations. This means that the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 42 is easier to accumulate than the white meter display MW shown in FIG. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state. It is comprised so that it may become. This is a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter rising item UpI) in the red meter display MR rather than a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter increase item UpI) in the white meter display MW. There will be more. Note that the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the red color of the meter frame mf (blue color here), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the same as the timing described in FIG. In FIG. 42 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 starts to slow down. In FIG. 42 (15), the variation of the right symbol becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration”). 7 ") becomes recognizable, and it will eventually reach the reach state. In FIG. 42 (16), it is a reach state, and the second meter rising item UpI appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. In FIG. 42 (17), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves from the front side to the position overlapping the red meter display MR. In FIG. 42 (18), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by 3 scales again, and the red meter display MR is in a full state. Note that the “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 42 (18) in which the meter rising item UpI has disappeared and the rising effect of the red meter display MR has ended.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 42 in stages.

  In FIG. 43 (19) that continues from FIG. 42 (18), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. The right design that has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative design display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (21), it has developed into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and as in FIG. 40 (29), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding frame UI disappears, and the castle town The screen changes from the background screen to the swordsman Misan screen. However, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top. In this super reach production, as shown in FIG. 43 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N switches to the wilderness background, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. The background of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is still the background of the castle town, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M still has the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display unit ST1. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord remains. Also, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top here. The super reach effect shown in FIG. 41 may be the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 43. Conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 43 is the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. It may be.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (23), the full red meter display MR is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. Yes. In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, Tono-sama greatly powers up and wins, that is, the expectation of jackpot increases. 43 (24) to FIG. 25 (25), the meter is used, and the red meter display MR decreases, and after passing through the fifth state, in FIG. It corresponds to an example of a state). In FIG. 43 (26), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the main character's character. As described above, the color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to a color that suggests a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It should be noted that the color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a higher level of big hit (for example, big hit determination).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (27), a scene after the swordsman character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed, and in FIG. Is displayed, and “decoration 7”, which is the same as “decoration 7” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a large symbol. In FIG. 43 (29), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 43 (30), these three third symbols are displayed. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change is won.

  The example shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 described above is an example in which the red meter display MR changes from the empty state (the meter is 0) to the full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. become. When the red meter display MR changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the jackpot symbol is finally more than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to the full state. It is easy to confirm. Further, in the red meter display MR, when the state changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the empty state does not change to the full tank state. The super reach effect described with reference to FIG. 43 corresponds to an example of a notice display that is displayed when the red meter display MR changes to a full tank state.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 44 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 42 (1) to (6). In FIG. 44 (7), the character cd throws a change ball icon cI and changes. A moving animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. 44 (7), the changing ball icon cI moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the changing icon c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. The icon cI hits the variation icon c, and the variation icon c is displayed so as to partially overlap from the front side. Also, the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 44 (8) has a different display mode, and an effect display ed2 is added. The effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when the meter display hits as shown in FIG. 42 (8), but may be a different effect display. In FIG. 44 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c that has been green so far changes to red. The red variation icon is more likely to win a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display than the green variation icon, and is ranked up here. Note that the rank may be lowered by the change ball icon cI. In the example shown in FIG. 44, the change ball icon cI changes the display mode of the change icon c, but the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining various types of meter display in detail. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 45 is an increase type.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to (f) corresponds to an example of the white meter display MW (first meter display shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 and FIGS. 42 (4) to (8). ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter display MW is a default meter display. Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 45A is an empty state (a state where the meter is 0), and corresponds to an example of a first state. Further, FIG. 45 (a) also shows a white meter raising item UpI. The meter rising item UpI is an item whose rate of increase of the meter changes depending on the type of meter display, and the white meter rising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter by a first amount.

  FIG. 45B shows a state where the meter of the white meter display MW that has been empty has been raised by one scale by the white meter raising item UpI shown in FIG. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by one scale with respect to the white meter display MW. The state of the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 45B corresponds to an example of a second state that is a state between the full state and the empty state.

  FIG. 45 (c) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb of the same color as the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased. This blue meter raising item UpIb is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a second amount.

  FIG. 45 (d) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW, which has been empty, is raised by two scales by the blue meter raising item UpIb shown in FIG. 45 (c). Has been. The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by two scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 45 (e) shows a red meter rising item UpIr. This red meter rising item UpIr is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a third amount.

  FIG. 45 (f) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW, which is in an empty state, is raised by four scales by the red meter rising item UpIr shown in FIG. 45 (e). Has been. The red meter rising item UpIr is an item to be raised by 4 scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In addition, a golden meter rising item may be displayed. The meter of the white meter display MW that was in an empty state is in a state where it has been raised by 5 scales (second state) or a full tank state (in which it has been raised by 6 scales) by the golden meter rising item. . Thus, the rate of increase of the meter is not constant and may vary depending on the lottery result or the like.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 45 (g) to (l) is the red meter display MR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 42 (9) to (18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has a greater amount of meter storage than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to the full state, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit. Therefore, the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit is higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. Further, the expectation of winning an advantageous jackpot may be higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The advantageous big hit here is, for example, a big hit with probability variation or a big hit with a large number of rounds with a ball.

  FIG. 45 (g) shows a default white meter rising item UpI, and FIG. 45 (h) shows a red meter display MR meter in an empty state, the white meter rising item. A state (fifth state) is shown that is raised by 3 scales at a time by UpI. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by 3 scales with respect to the red meter display MR.

  FIG. 45 (i) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb. In FIG. 45 (j), a red meter display MR meter that is empty is displayed by the blue meter rising item UpIb. It shows a state where it has risen by 6 scales at once, that is, a state where the tank is full (sixth state). The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by 6 scales (all scales) with respect to the red meter display MR.

  As described above, in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item UpI is tripled compared to the state where the white meter display MW is displayed.

  FIG. 45 (k) shows a green meter rising item UpIm. The green meter rising item UpIm is an item to be raised by 9 scales with respect to the red meter display MR. In the meter display, when the meter is full, the remaining scale (the overflowed scale) may be invalidated. However, in order to handle the remaining scale effectively, the empty meter display is additionally displayed. Is done. The type of meter display that is additionally displayed may be the same as the type of meter display that is full, or may be ranked up. That is, in FIG. 45 (l), a red meter display MR of the same type as that of the meter display in the full state is additionally displayed below the meter display in the full state. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 45 (l), a meter display in which the meter frame mf is gold may be displayed below the red meter display MR that is full. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 45 (l) has risen to three scales corresponding to the remaining scales.

  The meter display shown in FIG. 45 (m) and FIG. 45 (n) is a rainbow meter display MN whose meter frame mf is rainbow color. This rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. In the state in which the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full no matter how many colors of the meter rising item are displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (m), the rainbow meter display MN is empty, and even if the rainbow meter display item UpI is white, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. 45 (n). Become a tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, when the meter rises, the rainbow meter is always full, and further, the jackpot is confirmed.

  However, in the rainbow meter display MN, even if there is a remaining scale (overflowed scale) when the tank is full, a big hit is confirmed, so a new meter as shown in FIG. The display is not added and the remaining scale is invalidated.

  In addition, when one meter rising item is displayed regardless of a color, you may make it raise only by the same scale (for example, 1 scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item becomes the big hit expectation.

  In addition, the appearance timing of the meter rising item has been described above. However, if supplemented here, the meter rising item may be a big hit during symbol variation, long-term variation, pre-reach, super-reach, or temporary It may be easy to appear when stopping.

  The meter display described above may be a jackpot notice (so-called normal notice) in the symbol fluctuation display (the fluctuation) being displayed when the meter display starts to be displayed, or starts after the fluctuation. It may be a jackpot notice (pre-read notice) in the symbol variation display. That is, in the case of the expected degree of jackpot in the above description, the expected degree of jackpot in the fluctuation may be used, or the expected degree of jackpot in the symbol variation display started after that.

  45 (a) to 45 (f), the red meter display MR shown in FIGS. 45 (g) to 45 (l), and FIGS. 45 (m) and 45 (n). In addition to the color of the meter frame mf, the rainbow meter display MN shown in) may have different display sizes, and may have different display positions. Further, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the colors of the meters themselves may be different so that all the colors are different.

  Furthermore, when viewed from one meter display, the first state is that the meter frame is white and empty as shown in FIG. 45 (a), etc. FIG. 45 (b) or FIG. 45 (d) or FIG. The intermediate state shown in (f) where the meter frame is white and is neither empty nor full is the second state, and the meter frame is white and full is the third state (not shown in FIG. 45). 45 (g) and the like, and the meter frame is red and empty is the fourth state, and the meter frame is red and is neither empty nor full as shown in FIG. 45 (h). Is the fifth state, and the meter frame shown in FIG. 45 (j) is red and the full state is the sixth state.

  Hereinafter, the description of the meter effect will be continued, but the description of matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes.

  The state shown in FIG. 46 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3”. In this state, there is no special figure hold, and the first symbol pd1 continues to be stopped until it wins the special figure starting port 230,232. Further, a white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The white meter display MW here is empty. The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed from the stage prior to FIG. 46 (1), and may already be displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 46 (2), there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and in FIG. 46 (3), the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 is started in accordance with the start of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1. Then, on the stage cs in the variation icon display area, the display of the variation icon c in the white display mode which is the default display mode is started. Further, even when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the empty white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of the empty white meter display MW is displayed. Continues until FIG. 46 (18).

  46 (4) in which the special figure 1 is changing, there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first stage hs1 in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Display of the hold icon (the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 1) in the white display form, which is the default display form, has started. Further, in FIG. 46 (6), there is a single ball entering at the first special figure starting port 230, and the display state of the pre-reading notice is displayed in the second stage hs2 in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. The display of the hold icon in the green display mode (second hold icon h2 in FIG. 1) is started.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 46 (8), “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative pattern of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c having the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed even during the period during which the third symbol pd3 is being stopped (including during the fixed display) in FIG. 46 (1) and FIGS. 46 (8) to (9). The meter display may be always displayed. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 46 (10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the change icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 46 (10) is the default display mode, similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 46 (9), the hold icon that was the second hold icon h2 in the display form of the pre-reading notice is shifted and shifted to the first hold icon h1 in FIG. Yes.

  In FIG. 46 (11), a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes is started, and a change icon I2 appears gradually from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. In FIG. A change icon I2 is displayed on the display unit ST1. The change icon I2 is marked with the characters “weird”.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 46 (13), the Tono-like character cd draws a bow, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. It has been changed to "if you win."

  In FIG. 46 (14), the Tono-like character cd releases an arrow, and the arrow icon that is released and represents the arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Flying toward the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 46 (15), the flying arrow icon is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the left half of the arrow icon appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half appears to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs and part of the arrow icon is invisible.

  In FIG. 46 (16), the arrow icon hits the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M brilliantly. In FIG. 46 (17), the hit arrow icon disappears, and the change icon The display mode of I2 is changed, and an effect display ed3 is added. The effect display ed3 here is also an effect display similar to the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 42 (8), but may be a different effect display such as a different color. It should be noted that the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a different posture from the initial posture although the pose has been changed. In FIG. 46 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white icon The meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  47 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 47 (19) following FIG. 46 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). It has changed. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 47 (19) is also empty (the meter is 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display has succeeded in raising the rank from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the character cd disappears without pulling the bow, or the arrow of the one with the bow pulled. The icon disappears without hitting the icon, and even if the arrow icon hits, the icon disappears without adding the effect display, or even if the effect display is added, the white meter display MW There may be a case where the icon disappears without moving and the meter display remains the white meter display MW without any change. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the Tono-sama character cd does not draw a bow, the arrow icon does not hit, the effect display is not added, or the white meter display MW does not move. Then, the change icon I2 may disappear, and the meter display may remain unchanged with the white meter display MW. In addition, even if the change icon I2 with the effect display ed3 added or the change icon I2 not added has overlapped with the white meter display MW from the front side, the meter display itself is not ranked up, but the meter may rise. On the contrary, the meter may never rise. Furthermore, the meter display itself may be ranked down (for example, the red meter display MR changes to the white meter display MW).

  47 (20), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The character cd has returned to the initial posture. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 47 (21), the combination display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period in which the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed. Here, the red meter display MR is empty.

  In FIG. 47 (22), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 21 (21) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the meter display. In FIG. 47 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. That is, as in the example shown in FIG. 41, a treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 47 (25), a closed treasure box icon is displayed on the information display unit ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 47 (26), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and a white meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 47 (27), the meter rising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 47 (28), the meter rising item UpI is red. The meter display MR is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 47 (29), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR in which the meter can be stored more easily than the white meter display MW, the meter rises by 3 scales at once.

  In FIG. 47 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. In the following FIG. 47 (32), the left symbol that fluctuated has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated fluctuated is the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to the corner. 47 (33), as in the example shown in FIG. 41, has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. It has changed. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In FIG. 47 (34), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N all switch to the wilderness background, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character. Duel scene of has started. The red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated (corresponding to an example of the fifth state). In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated.

  In addition, the meter of the white meter display MW may rise between FIG. 46 (3)-FIG. 10 (10) before the meter display is changed.

  48 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG.

  The meter is used from FIG. 47 (36) to FIG. 48 (37), and the red meter display MR decreases. In FIG. 48 (37), the state is 0 (corresponding to an example of the fourth state). I'm back. In FIG. 48 (38), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 suggesting a big hit is added behind the main character's character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (39), the scene after the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. 40 (40), the scene in which the Tono-sama character wins. Is displayed, and “decoration 4” that is the same as “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner is displayed as a large symbol. In FIG. 48 (41), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” are displayed in a shake manner. In FIG. 42 (42), these three third symbols pd3 are displayed. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with a short time (electric support) is won.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41 and the examples shown in FIGS. 47 to 48, the meter display is in a state where the same three scales are accumulated, but in the example shown in FIG. In this example, which is a red meter display MR, it is a big hit super reach production. In this way, the degree of expectation for jackpots varies depending on the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf) separately from the storage state of the meter. That is, if the meter storage state (including the empty state) is the same, the red meter display MR has a higher expectation level than the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 48 (41).

  In the example shown in FIG. 48, a red meter display MR having a higher expectation of jackpot than the white meter display MW is displayed, and the red meter display MR is not in an empty state but is in a state where three scales are accumulated. . For this reason, there is a high expectation level for winning an advantageous jackpot, and re-lottery may be performed as shown in FIG. In other words, winning big wins (for example, big hits with probability variation or big hits with many rounds) that are more advantageous when the red meter display MR is stored for 3 scales than the white meter display MW is stored for 3 scales. Expectation to be higher.

  Here, FIG. 49 (42 ′) shows a state where three third symbols pd3 “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” shown in FIG. As shown, a button effect is started at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the button effects include a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press” as a prompt display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136. The remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period during which an operation is accepted as valid (operation valid period) is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. It should be noted that the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button image 136a.

  49 (43 ') to 44 (44'), the chance button 136 is not pressed, the operation effective period decreases, and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (45 '). In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 49 (46 ′), the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“ In the same figure (47 '), the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with probability change has been won. Yes. In other words, it is promoted from jackpot with short time (electric support) to jackpot with probability change.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period elapses, the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is displayed as “decoration 7”-“decoration”. 7 "-" decoration 7 "will change to a shaking display, will be confirmed, and will be promoted to a big hit with certainty.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a mini game that tells whether or not a meter display appears.

  In FIG. 50 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 50 (2), the fixed display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the losing in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 50 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 50 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the mini-game such as “If you win over drinking”. In FIG. 50 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 50 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image of the townscape of the castle town so far changes to a background image of a mini-game compared to drinking between Tonosama and Sakai. doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 50 (6), an explanation display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L for the mini-game background image to indicate that a sword dance meter (meter display) is displayed when Tono-sama wins the mini-game. In FIG. (7), a mini-game for drinking comparison is started. In FIG. 50 (8), the victory of Tono-sama in the mini game is notified, and in FIG. 50 (9), it is displayed that the sword dance meter has been acquired.

  In FIG. 50 (10), the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter on the display of the third symbol pd3 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize what color the sword dance meter is displayed by the effect display ed4. In the present specification, the phrase “difficult to visually recognize” means that it is relatively difficult to visually recognize compared to the states before and after that. In FIG. 50 (11), the effect display ed4 disappears and the white meter display MW, which is a sword dance meter, is clearly displayed.

  If Tono-sama is defeated in the mini game, the sword dance meter is not displayed. The effect by the mini game described with reference to FIG. 50 corresponds to the effect of acquiring the meter display.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a big hit is determined by the change when the meter display is full.

  FIGS. 51 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 40 (1) to (9). In FIG. 51 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, Swing fluctuation is started (second stop), and a golden meter rising item UpIg appears. As described above, the golden meter raising item UpIg raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales or 6 scales. In FIG. 51 (10), a white meter display MW stored for one scale is displayed, and the appearance of the golden meter rising item UpIg means that the big hit is determined with the change. That is, when the meter rising item (gold color here or red shown in FIG. 45 (e)) that the meter is easy to accumulate appears, the big hit is larger than the meter rising item (for example, white) that is difficult to store the meter. Expectation increases. In FIG. 51 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 51 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. In the case of an increase of 6 divisions, there is an excess of one division, but since the big hit has been confirmed by the change and the next change will be after the big hit game ends, the remaining one division will continue until the next change. It cannot be carried over and is invalidated. In addition, a voice “congratulations” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. The sound output here corresponds to a jackpot notification sound for notifying that the meter is full and the jackpot is confirmed.

  In FIG. 51 (13), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd 3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. In FIG. 51 (14), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking manner, and in FIG. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change is won.

  The example shown in FIG. 51 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW changes from the empty state (the meter is 0 state) to the full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. When the white meter display MW changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally reached, rather than when the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to the full tank state. Is easy to confirm. Furthermore, also in the white meter display MW, the case where the state is changed from the empty state to the full state is more than the case where the state is not changed from the empty state to the full state as in the examples shown in FIGS. However, it is easy to finally display the big hit symbol.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame.

  The holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 52 is also provided with a base icon UIb ′ extending left and right with a vertical stripe pattern. The base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 52 is the base icon UIb shown in FIG. Higher than. In addition, in the effect display area provided on the right side in the holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 52, an empty white meter display MW is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts. Since the white icon display MW has a high base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 52, the white meter display MW is completely within the hold frame UI ′ and integrated with the hold frame UI ′. It suffices if a part of UI ′ is covered. In other words, the meter display only needs to partially or entirely overlap with the holding frame UI ′, and the holding frame UI ′ corresponds to an example of a holding display area in a broad sense, and is also an example of an icon display area. Equivalent to. In the example shown in FIG. 52, the meter display is always displayed in the holding frame UI '. That is, the meter display is also displayed during the period in which the hold frame UI 'is displayed, and the meter display also disappears when the hold frame UI' disappears. However, the tutorial display ts is always displayed, and the meter display may be displayed instead of the tutorial display ts only when the meter is produced.

  In FIG. 52 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 52 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 52 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 52 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Then, the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 52 (5), the dialogue “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini item appearance notice is made. In FIG. 52 (6), a white meter rising item UpI has appeared, and Tono-sama's character cd carries the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 52 (7), the Tono-like character cd throws the meter rising item UpI, and the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. Note that the meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 52 (7) does not overlap with the white meter display MW, but only partially overlaps the base icon UIb ′. You may display so that all may overlap.

  In FIG. 52 (8), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to a state where one scale is accumulated. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (9), a tutorial display such as “Continue when meter is full” is displayed.

  In FIG. 52 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 52 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 52 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops, and the fluctuation fluctuation starts (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 52 (13), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. In FIG. 52 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) to a full tank at once.

  In FIG. 52 (15), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 52 (16), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 52 (17), as in FIG. 40 (15), the pseudo-continuous effect cut-in display is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 52 (18), the cut-in display disappears, the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect starts to change again, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start low-speed fluctuation, and part of the left symbol A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so that the two overlap. The white meter display MW that has been in a full state continues to be displayed until re-variation is started, but the white meter display MW returns to an empty state in response to the start of re-variation. Then, after the pseudo-continuous effect continues, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  The pseudo-continuous effect described with reference to FIG. 52 is such that the meter display (in this case, the white meter display MW, but other meter display (for example, red meter display MR)) may be full. This corresponds to an example of a notice display that is displayed when the display changes.

  The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed in a full state until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the full white meter display MW is displayed only until the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous effect) in FIG. 52 (16), and may return to an empty state.

  The timing at which the meter display returns to the empty state is the symbol variation display (including the symbol variation display subject to notice when the meter display is a normal notice), or the meter display. Is a symbol change display immediately before the symbol change display subject to the prefetch notice, or in the symbol change display subject to the prefetch notice, the empty symbol is displayed when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. You may return to the state. For example, in each of the symbol variation displays described above, the state may be returned to the empty state when the symbol is stopped without being full. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. Further, in the second state or the fifth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or displayed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, it may be configured to always return to an empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. In addition, the meter display may be returned to the empty state and the display of the empty state may be continued only after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the next symbol variation display starts immediately without any subsequent hold. If not, the meter display may disappear, but the display may continue in an empty state. In addition, when there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display is started immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

  Further, the white meter display MW may be changed to the red meter display MR within the holding frame UI ′, or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of acquiring and stocking mini-items step by step when the meter-displayed meter is full.

  FIGS. 53 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 40 (1) to (6). In FIG. 53 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Also, a red meter rising item UpIr appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This red meter rising item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 53 (8), the moving animation of the red meter rising item UpIr is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr moves from the front side to the position overlapping the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 53 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by 4 scales.

  In FIG. 53 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the reach state is formed or at the timing before and after. In FIG. 53 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps with the white meter display MW stored for four scales. In FIG. 53 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. The golden meter rising item UpIg is an item for raising the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales. If the white meter display MW stored for 4 scales, the scale of 3 scales (overflow) However, in FIG. 53 (12), there is no display of the remaining scale, and in FIG. 53 (13), the mini item is displayed at the right end of the full white meter display MW. A pseudo-announcement item NI, which is a type, appears, and a character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side on the right symbol or the like temporarily stopped in the third symbol pd3. The pseudo-continuous notice item NI is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (14), the “decoration 7” is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, the character display “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. And it is displayed on the information display part ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, and the pseudo continuous notice item NI is stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (15), the remaining three graduations are added to the empty white meter display MW. In other words, the display of the overflowed state due to the full tank state is started at this timing. The opportunity to raise the white meter display MW continues after this.

  The white meter display MW in FIG. 53 (12) to FIG. 15 (15) described above is not ranked down, but the portion that has become full is replaced with the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the remaining portion. Is displayed again.

  In FIG. 53 (16), the pseudo continuous announcement item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, and the pseudo continuous announcement item NI is digested. In addition, a text display of “Activate” is displayed below the pseudo-continuous notice item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of “Activation” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-announcement item NI is activated, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started immediately thereafter.

  In FIG. 53 (17), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 fluctuates (temporarily stops). The middle symbol here is a pseudo-continuous symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect starts. Is done.

  In the example described above, when the meter display becomes full, various mini items appear without being limited to the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the appearing mini items can be stocked. If the mini item that appears is an item related to jackpot (for example, a pseudo-announcement item NI), the meter display full state is equivalent to high expectation of jackpot, Eventually, the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIGS. 54A and 54B are diagrams showing an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in a single full tank of the meter display.

  FIGS. 54 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 40 (1) to (6). In FIG. 54 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, two meter rising items, a red meter rising item UpIr and a blue meter rising item UpIb, appear at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, a plurality of meter rising items appear simultaneously.

  In FIG. 54 (8), the movement animation of the two meter rising items is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb move from the front side to the position overlapping the empty white meter display MW. To do. As described above with reference to FIG. 45, the meter of the white meter display MW is an item for raising the red meter up item UpIr by 4 scales, and the blue meter rise item UpIb is an item for raising the scale by 2 scales. is there. In FIG. 54 (9), the meter rising item of both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW that has been empty until now is the red meter rising item. Ascending up to 4 scales as UpIr, and ascending by 2 scales as blue meter rising item UpIb, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 54 (9) is full.

  In FIG. 54 (10), at the right end of the full white meter display MW, two pseudo-announcement items NI which are a kind of mini-item appear, and “decoration 7” of the right design temporarily stopped, etc. One character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 53, the white meter display MW is full with one red meter rising item UpIr. In this example, there are two red meter rising items UpIr and blue meter rising item UpIb. White meter display MW is full with meter rising items. Whether the red meter rise item UpIr or the blue meter rise item UpIb, the meter rise rate is higher than the default white meter rise item UpI, and the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb This is an easy-to-store item. From this, it can be said that there is a high possibility that a plurality of items can be stocked when a meter rising item that easily stores the meter appears. The red meter display MR may be more likely to be able to stock a plurality of items than the white meter display MW.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 54 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display of “GET” disappears. One pseudo continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and two pseudo continuous notice items NI are stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (12), the white meter display MW in an empty state is still displayed, and there remains a chance to raise the white meter display MW. When there is no chance or when the big hit is confirmed, the white meter display MW may be erased when it becomes empty or may be erased after returning to the empty state. Also, one of the two pseudo-continuous notice items NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed. “Activate” is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 54 (12), first, one pseudo-announcement item NI is digested, and the entire third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped and re-variation is started. Then, a second temporary stop and a start of re-variation are performed by the stocked second pseudo-continuous notice item NI.

  Of the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there are items that can be carried over until the next symbol variation display (for example, pre-reading notice items), but they cannot be carried over and are currently being carried out. There is also an item (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice item NI) that is digested during the symbol change display.

  Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 54, there may be a case where a plurality of items are stocked with one full meter, but on the contrary, there are cases where items are not stocked even when the meter is full. May be. For example, when the white meter display MW becomes full due to the white meter rising item UpI, the pseudo continuous notice item NI itself does not appear or is not stocked even if it appears.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example in which the meter display in the full state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

  FIGS. 55 (1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 54 (1) to (8). In FIG. 54 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 is slow. Thus, the right design (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. Also, both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappear, and the white meter display MW meter that has been empty until now becomes full even in the example of FIG. It has become. However, as shown in FIG. 55 (10), in this example, an item such as the pseudo-continuous notice item NI does not appear, and the full state of the white meter display MW is maintained. Further, in the third symbol pd3, “decoration 1” different from the left symbol of “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. That is, it does not enter the reach state as in the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 55 (10), the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the white meter display MW becoming full, and the display content is related to the pre-reading notice such as “next chance”. .

  In FIG. 55 (11), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. In FIG. 55 (12), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” are displayed in a shaking manner. This combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” is a chance, and in FIG. 55 (13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in response to the shaking indication (temporary stop) of the chance. The flash pattern fd emits light with a transparent light guide plate arranged on the front side of the light. Note that the flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the light guide plate.

  In FIG. 55 (14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance chance is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 55 (15), the third symbol pd3 of chance is confirmed and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Also, in response to the final display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again, and the display content suggests a chance item such as “the order of 711”. Even if the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a stopped state or a final display, the full white meter display MW is still displayed. In FIG. 55 (16), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 15 (15), that is, the next symbol fluctuation display is started, and the low speed fluctuation starts in the third symbol pd3. Has been. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the full white state meter display MW continues to be displayed in a full state and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. 55 (9) to FIG. 15 (15), the full white meter display MW corresponds to a pre-reading notice, and the full white meter display MW in FIG. 16 (16) corresponds to a normal notice.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing step by step an example where the meter display is full and items are digested without being stocked even if items appear.

  FIGS. 56 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 40 (1) to (6). In FIG. 56 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This golden meter rising item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 56 (8), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 56 (9), the change in the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is full.

  In FIG. 56 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. At the same time as the reach state is formed, or at the timing before and after the reach state, an operation means notice display icon 136I which is a kind of mini item appears on the right end of the full white meter display MW, and the third symbol pd3 is displayed. Among them, the character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap the temporarily stopped right symbol or the like from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon for notifying that an effect of the operation means notice (for example, button notice) will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display showing that. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 56 (10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs even if the operating means is operated. That is, an effect (for example, a notice effect) according to the operation of the operation means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operation means has not been accepted, or that the operation has been invalidated as accepted. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation unit is not accepted, and that the operation is invalidated as accepted, and the operation of the operation unit is invalid. This color indicates that the operation is invalid.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 56 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display of “GET” disappears and continues. In FIG. 12 (12), the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol during high-speed fluctuation, and changes the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 56 (13), the button effect is started for the middle symbol. Also in the button effect here, as with the button effect shown in FIG. 49, the button image 136a, the arrow display 136b and the character display “press” as the promotion display, and the remaining period meter display 136c are one set. Is displayed. Further, red is a color that prompts the operation means to operate, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button.

  In FIG. 56 (14), the chance button 136 is not pressed and the operation effective period is reduced, but the chance button 136 is pressed at the next timing (15). In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 56 (16), the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This character display corresponds to a normal notice.

  In the example shown in FIG. 56 described above, the item acquired by the meter full is used immediately. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device that is different from the decorative symbol display device whose display has been started. It is also used during symbol variation display that is being performed when display is started. However, there may be cases where the operation means notice display icon 136I remains white and is stocked until the operation valid period of the operation means arrives, and in some cases, stock until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display may be stocked. Also good.

  Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period has elapsed, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed and the normal notice is executed.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear.

  In FIG. 57 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. The 4 symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 57 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the loss in the third symbol pd3 is displayed, and the variation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 57 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 57 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 57 (4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, an empty white meter display MW (for example, on the upper left of the third symbol pd3) , Corresponding to an example of the first meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Here, the display of the two white meter displays MW is started separately, but the display may be started together.

  In FIG. 57 (7), a red meter rising item UpIr appears in the left pattern of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped, and in FIG. (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed on the left white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 57 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and only the meter on the left white meter display MW is increased by four scales.

  In FIG. 57 (10), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the right pattern of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped. In FIG. 11 (11), the gold meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the right white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 57 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and only the meter on the right white meter display MW is increased by 5 scales.

  In FIG. 57 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued the high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. 57 (14), the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol ("continuation"), and in Fig. 57 (15), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops) and overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbol from the front side. Three white meter rising items UpI are displayed. As shown in FIG. 57 (16), two of these three white meter rising items UpI move to the left white meter display MW, and the other one moves to the right white meter display MW.

  In each of the two white meter displays MW shown in FIG. 57 (17), the meter is raised by the meter raising item UpI that has moved. That is, the white meter display MW on the left side rises by two scales and becomes full, and the white meter display MW on the right side rises by one scale and becomes full. Furthermore, when the tank is full, a chance-up item CUI appears on the left white meter display MW and a character display of “GET” is displayed. On the right white meter display MW, the swordsman reach item RI is displayed. A character display of “GET” is displayed as it appears. The chance-up item CUI that appears on the left white meter display MW is an icon indicating that the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the current symbol change display has increased, and the swordsman reach item that appeared on the right white meter display MW RI is an icon for notifying that it will develop into a swordsman reach that is a kind of super reach production in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 57 (18), each of the two white meter displays MW that are in the full state disappears, the character display of each “GET” disappears, the chance-up item CUI, the swordsman reach item RI, and the second decorative design It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Note that each of the two white meter displays MW that are full may be changed to an empty state without erasing them. As shown in FIG. 57 (18), the meter display may be turned off.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one of them disappears.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 58 (1), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative pattern of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c having the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area.

  In FIG. 58 (3), the change display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the change icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 58 (3) is a default display mode similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 58 (2), the hold icon that was the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice is shifted and shifted to the first hold icon h1 in FIG. Yes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (4), after the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the empty white meter display MW (for example, the first symbol pd3 is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol pd3). Equivalent to an example of meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 58 (6), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini-item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 58 (7), a change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 58 (8), Tono-sama character cd throws a change ball icon cI. In FIG. 9 (9), the change ball icon cI hits the right white meter display MW, and the right white meter display MW It is displayed so as to overlap the right end from the front side. The display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 58 (9) is changed, and an effect display ed1 is added. The change ball icon cI displayed with the effect display ed1 added at the right end of the right white meter display MW is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yes. In FIG. 58 (10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right side changes to the red meter display MR while being in an empty state (the meter is 0). Yes. That is, it corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display is changed from the first state to the fourth state. A plurality of meter displays MW may change at the same time. That is, according to this example, the white meter display MW on the left side may be changed to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is in the zero state) together with the white meter display MW on the right side.

  In FIG. 58 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and shake fluctuation starts (first). Stop). In addition, a blue meter rising item UpIb appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, one blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of “decoration 7” from the front side.

  In FIG. 58 (13), the split animation of the blue meter rising item UpIb is started, and one blue meter rising item UpIb is split into two, the left empty white meter display MW and the right side A blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed on each empty red meter display MR. As described above, the blue meter rising item UpIb is an item that is raised by 2 scales for the white meter display MW and is raised by 6 scales for the red meter display MR. In FIG. 58 (14), the left and right blue meter rising items UpIb disappear, and the left white meter display MW meter rises only by two scales, whereas the right red meter display MR meter is It is rising to a full tank at once. In the red meter display MR on the right side that is full, a swordsman reach item RI appears and a character display of “GET” is displayed. It should be noted that no item has appeared in the left white meter display MW that has not reached the full state.

  In FIG. 58 (17), only the red meter display MR on the right side, which is in a full state, disappears and the character display of “GET” also disappears, and the swordsman reach item RI is the second decorative pattern. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 58 (17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 58 (18), the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and the variation icon c disappears. After all, the stock swordsman reach item RI was not used in the symbol change display at the time of appearance. Accordingly, the swordsman reach item RI here corresponds to a pre-reading type icon for notifying the development of the swordsman reach which is a kind of super reach production in the next symbol variation display.

  59 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 58 step by step.

  In FIG. 59 (19) following FIG. 58 (18), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the red first hold icon h1 which is the pre-reading notice mode of FIG. In the 3 symbol pd3, the low speed fluctuation is started. Note that the fluctuation icon c is also displayed in a red display mode, and functions as a normal notice. In addition, the white meter display MW on the left side accumulated up to two scales shown in FIG. 58 (18) is still displayed even after a new symbol variation display is started, and has been carried over to the next symbol variation display. become. That is, a continuous symbol variation display is straddled with the meter accumulated.

  In FIG. 59 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 59 (21), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 59 (22), the left symbol variation becomes even slower, the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable, and the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 also changes from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation. Has changed.

  In FIG. 59 (23), the left symbol temporarily stops and fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after.

  In FIG. 59 (24), the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 59 (25), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is raised by one scale. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 59 (25), the vehicle enters the reach state, and the sound “reach” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 59 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the swordsman reach item RI stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the character display “Activate” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is displayed. In FIG. 59 (27), the left symbol that has fluctuated has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated has also changed to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to. The white meter display MW displayed at the upper left also moves to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (28), it has developed into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. The swordsman reach item RI has disappeared from the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 59 (28). The swordsman reach production started in this way is the same as the swordsman reach production shown in FIG. 43 (22) and after, and detailed explanation is omitted, but here, the white meter display MW has been stored only up to 3 scales. Nevertheless, in FIG. 59 (33), a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the Tono-sama character. In the example shown in FIG. 41, in the power-up from the white meter display MW that has been stored only up to 3 divisions, the green aura icon OI1 is shown in FIG. 41 (34), but this is shown in FIG. In the example, if multiple meter displays are displayed in the previous symbol variation display, it is easier to hit big than the case where only one meter display is shown, and the color of the aura icon is also a color with high expectation of big hit It becomes easy to become. Even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, a red meter display MR or the like) is displayed rather than only the default white meter display MW. Is displayed more easily, and the color of the aura icon is likely to be a color with a higher expectation level for the jackpot.

All the meter displays so far are of the increasing type, and the display was started in an empty state (the meter is 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full state. The display may be started in the state (second state or fifth state).

  FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example in which the display is started in a state where the increase type meter display is accumulated halfway.

  In FIG. 60 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 60 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the losing pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 60 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 2 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and here, a character string such as “when the meter appears with a little accumulated” scrolls in the tutorial display ts. Displayed.

  In FIG. 60 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and the display is started on the third symbol pd3 while the white meter display MW is accumulated from the beginning to the middle. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 60 (4) is a state in which one graduation is stored, and corresponds to an example of a second state. In addition, a “chance” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 60 (4) in accordance with the appearance of the meter display in a state where the meter is accumulated halfway.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 60 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 60 (6), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the golden meter rising item UpIg. In FIG. 60 (7), Tono-like character cd throws a golden meter rising item UpIg, and the golden meter rising item UpIg is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 60 (8), the gold meter rising item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 60 (9), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from a state where one scale is accumulated to a full state. Since the gold meter rising item UpIg is an item that raises the meter at least for 5 scales, when the display is started with the meter display accumulated halfway, when the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, The meter is full.

  In the white meter display MW, the big hit symbol is finally determined when the state of being stored halfway is changed to the full tank state than when the state of being stored halfway is not changed to the full tank state. Easy to display. Furthermore, in the case where the white meter display MW is displayed in the state where it is accumulated halfway, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the display is started in an empty state. The same applies to the red meter display MR.

  In the state where the meter is stored halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item is increased. For example, compared with the state where the meter is 0 (first state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item may be doubled.

  So far, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display indicating a numerical value.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a meter effect by meter display showing numerical values in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 61 (1), the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed, and the tutorial display ts has a display content such as “When the meter is red”. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 61 (2), a white numerical meter display DW appears, and from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Sound) is output. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 61 (2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and its state is a state where the numerical value is 00%. This state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. Also, in FIG. 61 (2), the tutorial display ts has changed to display content such as “Meter MAX reached”.

  In FIG. 61 (3), the eight-seen character 224 Fa that is one of the movable means falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208 L. In response to the operation of the movable means, a white meter rising item UpI appears as shown in FIG. 61 (4). However, the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is located in front of the white meter rising item UpI, and a part of the white meter rising item UpI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 61 (5), the white meter rising item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter rising item UpI is improved. In FIG. 61 (6), the eight generations 224Fa rises and returns to the initial position, and the movement animation of the white meter raising item UpI is started. The white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 61 (6) is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 61 (7). The UpI is displayed at a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW. The numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 61 (7) is temporarily difficult to visually recognize due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 61 (8), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW is restored, and the numerical display increases from 00% to 10%. Yes. The state of the white numerical meter display DW that performs 10% numerical display shown in FIG. 61 (8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

  In FIG. 61 (9), the shogunate 224Fb falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 61 (10), a change ball icon cI appears at a position behind the general character 224Fb according to the movement of the general character 224Fb, which is a movable means. A part of the change ball icon cI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 61 (11), the change ball icon cI moves downward, the overlap with the falling general's character 224Fb is eliminated, and the visibility of the change ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 61 (12), the general character 224Fb moves up and returns to the initial position, and the change ball icon cI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. doing. In FIG. 61 (13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numerical meter display DW until then changes to a red numerical meter display DR (corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display). In other words, the meter display is replaced with a different type. The change of the meter display here is not made by the accumulated numerical value but by a change effect (in this case, an effect using the change ball icon cI). Further, the rate of increase in the numerical value varies depending on the relationship between the color of the numeric meter display and the color of the meter rising item, that is, the relationship between the type of the numeric meter display and the type of the item, as in the description using FIG. To do.

  In FIG. 61 (14), there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first stage hs1 in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Should be displayed. However, in FIG. 61 (15), the green meter rising item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, and it is difficult to confirm the presence of the first hold icon h1. . In FIG. 61 (16), the green meter rising item UpIm moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the red numerical meter display DR, and the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. The presence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. Note that the hold icon may be displayed on the near side of the meter rising item.

  The appearance of the meter rising item here is triggered by winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, but it may be triggered by winning a prize at the usual figure starting port accompanied by a prize ball, or accompanied by a prize ball Regardless of whether or not it is possible to trigger the passing of the game ball at the normal start gate, it may be triggered by winning the second special figure start port 232 (electric Chu), there is only a prize ball A winning at the general winning opening 226 may be used as a trigger, or a ball entering the out-out opening for production may be used as a trigger.

  Further, when the meter display is displayed, the item (not limited to the meter rising item, for example, a chance-up item) can be obtained by winning or entering the special drawing start opening 230, 232, etc., compared to the case where the meter display is not displayed. CUI, swordsman reach item RI, etc.) are likely to appear.

  In FIG. 61 (17), the green meter rising item UpIm disappears, and the numerical display of the red numerical meter display DR increases from 10% to MAX. This MAX is a display representing 100%, for example. The state of the red numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 61 (17) corresponds to an example of a sixth state.

  In the meter production shown in FIG. 61, when the numerical meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 61 (18), the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the numerical meter display from the front side. . The character display of “Gekiatsu” may be a display indicating that the big hit in the change is rich or that the big hit is confirmed.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 61 changes according to the operation of the operation means.

  62 (1) shows that the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed. In FIG. 62 (2), there is a single ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding shown in FIG. In the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 is started. The first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 62 (3) is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 displayed on a white round icon in red for prompting an operation. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold display mode. Further, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit red to prompt the operation. In FIG. 62 (4), the chance button 136 is operated.

  In FIG. 62 (5), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the white numerical meter display DW is changed to the red numerical meter display DR. On the other hand, in the display mode of the first hold icon h1, the button image 136a is eliminated, and only the white round icon, that is, the default display mode is set. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the display mode of the prefetch notice, even though the first hold icon h1 is in the button hold display mode. The meter display has been replaced with a different type of meter display. This is an effect of notifying the big hit with the change, and in the case of a pre-reading notice for notifying the big hit after the next change, the first hold icon h1 may be changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice. Note that the numerical meter display can also be used as a pre-reading notice (for example, carry over to the next change after the MAX display).

  Thus, when the meter display is displayed, the hold icon for the button hold is more likely to be displayed when winning or entering the special figure starting port 230, 232 or the like than when the meter display is not displayed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of effects different from the meter effects described so far in stages.

  In FIG. 63, the display showing a certain amount or number is displayed as in the meter display described so far, but here, the appearance number of characters is used instead of the meter. The display using the number of appearances of the character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

  In FIG. 63 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 63 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third symbol pd3 is displayed, and the variation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 63 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 63 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is “When a character appears”. In FIG. 63 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image of the streets of the castle town disappears so far. The silhouettes of the four characters are displayed in a horizontal row. The state shown in FIG. 63 (5) corresponds to an empty state (a state where the meter is 0) in the meter display, that is, no character display, ie, the first state or the fourth state. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 63 (6), a princess Chibi character display cd1 appears at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “3 more people”. In FIG. 63 (7), a spear character display cd2 appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “two more”. In FIG. 63 (8), the princess character display cd3 appears to the left of the princess character display cd1, and the character display changes to “one more person”. Each of the state shown in FIG. 63 (6), the state shown in FIG. 63 (7), and the state shown in FIG. 63 (8) corresponds to the second state or the fifth state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 63, when three people are gathered, as shown in FIG. 63 (9), a character display of “failure” is displayed, and all the members cannot be assembled, and the first decorative design shown in FIG. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is resumed. Then, in FIG. 63 (11), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 ends, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 63 (12), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  Note that the color of the character's silhouette is usually gray, but when the other person is left, the silhouette of the remaining one character may be displayed in red. In this case, the set of all four persons is confirmed, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. The state in which all four people are gathered corresponds to the full state in the meter display, that is, the third state or the sixth state. In this example of gathering characters, when all four people are gathered, the expectation level of jackpot is very high, and the level of jackpot may be high, or a level higher than the jackpot density (for example, jackpot confirmation). Moreover, even if all four people do not gather, it does not become “failure”, and a degree of expectation of jackpot may be given to some extent, or even if only three people gather, there may be a big hit due to the change Alternatively, there may be a case where a big hit is caused by a symbol variation display started after the variation.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an error occurs during the meter display.

  FIGS. 64 (1) to (4) are the same as FIGS. 58 (1) to (4). In FIG. 64 (5), a dish full tank error has occurred, and FIG. In the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (just above the third symbol pd3), an error display ER1 such as “please remove the sphere” is displayed. The error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the empty white meter display MW displayed at the upper left of the third symbol pd3. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed overlapping with at least a part (for example, all) of the white meter display MW from the front side. Further, the error display ER1 may be a display having transparency, and may overlap the meter display from the front side or the overlapping part may be seen through.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (6), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 64 (7), the left symbol temporarily stops. However, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping the part of the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) that is temporarily stopped, from the front side, while the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all) of the decorative symbol from the front side. Thus, the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the meter display and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 64 (7), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 64 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed. However, it has moved from the front side to the position where it overlaps the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the red meter rising item UpIr from the front side. In FIG. 64 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears and the meter of the white meter display MW should have risen by 4 scales, but the right half or more of the white meter display MW is hidden by the error display ER1. As a result, it is impossible to confirm how far the meter has risen. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 64 (9), one note is raised by one scale, and here, the sound of four notes is output. Note that the meter storage (rising state) is not limited to the output sound from the speaker 120, but can also be notified by the light emission mode of light emitting means such as lamps and frame lamps around the decorative symbol display device.

  In FIG. 64 (10), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. 64 (11), the right symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation starts (second stop), 2 A white meter rising item UpI, which is the first meter rising item, appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. As shown in FIG. 64 (12), the white meter rising item UpI is also moved from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the white meter rising item UpI from the front side. In FIG. 64 (13), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale, but the error display ER1 still overlaps, so how far the meter has increased Although it cannot be confirmed whether or not the sound has been made, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 64 (13).

  In FIG. 64 (14), a white meter rising item UpI appears without a mini item appearance notice shown in FIG. 52 (5) and the like, and Tono-sama character cd carries the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 64 (15), Tono-sama character cd throws white meter rising item UpI, and white meter rising item UpI hits white meter display MW and should be displayed on white meter display MW. However, since the error display ER1 overlaps, it is difficult to confirm the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 64 (16), the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale by the white meter increase item UpI. However, since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter has increased. However, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 64 (16). Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW partially shown in FIG. 64 (16) is in a full state, and a full notification sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. It is output.

  In FIG. 64 (18), a pseudo-continuous notice item NI, which is a kind of mini item, appears at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state, and at the position of the middle symbol in the third symbol pd3 that continues to fluctuate at high speed. Although the character display of “GET” is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps both the pseudo-continuous notice item NI and the character display of “GET”, and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired. .

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of error display ER1 shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (19) following FIG. 64 (18), the character display “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (20), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW is continuously displayed in an empty state. In FIG. 65 (21), the pseudo-continuous notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI is digested. An error display ER1 overlaps from the front side on the pseudo-continuous notice item NI that has moved to the position of the symbol, making it difficult to view. In FIG. 65 (22), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 65 (23), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 1 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps with the pseudo continuous symbol (“continuation”) from the front side, and the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the pseudo continuous symbol.

  In FIG. 65 (24), the error display ER1 is still displayed, and in this example, the ball removal operation has not been performed until the end. That is, when the ball removal operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as “please remove the ball” is automatically hidden. In other words, if the error is resolved, the error display ER1 automatically disappears.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the player cannot visually confirm the state of the meter display (for example, the degree of accumulation, etc.), so the player is concerned about the state of the meter display. May display the error display ER1 superimposed on the meter display so that the ball removal operation can be performed quickly. In addition, since the meter display tends to be good for the player when accumulated, the player's line of sight is likely to gather all the time, and the error display ER1 is displayed on the meter display so that the error display ER1 can be easily noticed. There is also an effect.

  Further, in this example, a prize winning error that is more serious than the dish full error occurs, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (24) has a display size larger than the display size of the previous error display ER1. Thus, an error display ER2 for notifying the occurrence of a winning abnormality error is displayed. This error display ER2 overlaps the error display ER1 from the front side in addition to the third symbol pd3, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. It may be possible to tell that a serious error has occurred by overlapping another error display ER2 on the error display ER1. It should be noted that the error displays do not necessarily have to overlap with each other, and at least the display size may be larger for a serious error. As an example of the serious error mentioned here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error that cannot be resolved without calling a store clerk, or an error display is automatically displayed even if the error is resolved Errors that are not hidden (cannot be deleted) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as serious errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Alternatively, the more serious the error is described in the list shown in FIG. That is, the most serious error is a magnetic (magnet) detection error. On the other hand, as an example of a minor error, an error detected by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, an error that can be resolved only by the player, and an error display is displayed when the error is resolved. Errors that automatically disappear (disappear) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as minor errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Further, among minor errors, there may be an error in which the meter display is preferentially displayed or the third symbol pd3 is preferentially displayed.

  Also, the error display in FIGS. 64 and 65 is the same in various error displays described in FIGS. 124 to 126 described later. In particular, the notification content described as “Liquid Crystal Display” in “Mode” in FIG. 126 showing the notification mode of error notification of various errors can be replaced with the error display in FIGS. 64 and 65.

  In the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front” is replaced with the description “at least a part of the display overlaps at least a part of the other display from the front”. All of one display may overlap all of the other displays from the front side, all of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side, The part may overlap all other displays from the front side, or a part of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side. Further, in the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front side” can be read in reverse, that is, “the other display overlaps with a certain display from the front side”.

  In the above description, the meter display is an increase type in which a display indicating a certain amount or number only increases. However, even if the display indicating a certain amount or number increases or decreases, Of course, it may be of a decreasing type in which the display representing a certain quantity or number only decreases.

  The meter display includes a white meter display MW, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW and a red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. Although the display using the number of appearances of the character shown in 63 has been described, the display is not limited to these, and the display may indicate a certain amount or number of hands, or display using the number of figures and symbols. Also good.

  Furthermore, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be started independently, instead of the change from the white meter display MW. Alternatively, the red meter display MR may be a meter display that is not displayed unless changed from the white meter display MW.

  Further, the red meter display MR may change when the white meter display MW is stored halfway, and the display of the white meter display MW may be taken over and the display may be started with the halfway stored. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself that has been stored halfway may be started alone. In these cases, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the display is started halfway than when the display is started in an empty state.

  Furthermore, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the red meter display MR is stored halfway than when the white meter display MW is stored halfway.

  In addition, in the above description, it is easy to “definitely display the big hit symbol finally”. The statement to that effect is “easy to win a jackpot that is more advantageous than an unfavorable jackpot”. It can be replaced with a statement to that effect.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp and illumination until now is an example of a light emission means, and if a lamp | ramp emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube, it can replace.

  The effects during the display of the decorative symbol variation display among the examples of the effects described in Examples 1 to 14 and the modification may be executed during the stop display of the decoration symbol variation display. Moreover, the production examples described in the first to fourteenth embodiments and the modification examples can also be executed in the pachinko machine 100 illustrated in FIGS. 34 to 65.

  Further, for example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 66, “a plurality of types of symbols 1002 and a plurality of reels 1002 which are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 displays a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins. And the stopped displayed After moving, are also suitable for the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  67 (a), “A bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and a lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it is realized as a single technical idea.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a notice display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of animation,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the notice display,
One of the plurality of types of anime is a first anime,
The first animation is an animation including an erasing scene of a fluctuation icon,
The first icon is the variation icon in the first animation,
The notice icon is an icon that may at least partially overlap the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The first animation is an animation that may be displayed during the stop display of the decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 2,
The first animation is an animation that is not displayed during the variation display of the decorative design.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The first animation is an animation that may be displayed during the variation display of the decorative design.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
One of the plurality of types of anime is a second anime,
The second animation is an animation including an appearance scene of the notice icon,
The second icon is the notice icon in the second animation,
The second animation is an animation that may be displayed during the display of the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
In the second animation, the second icon starts to overlap at least a part of the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 7)
The game machine according to appendix 5 or 6,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a prefetch notice display,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a prefetch notice icon,
The prefetch notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice display,
The second animation is an animation that may be displayed as the prefetch notice display,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 5 to 7,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The display means can display a display for changing the hold icon displayed in the first display mode to a second display mode different from the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “pending change display”). Means,
The notice icon is an icon indicating the start of the hold change display,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed even after the second animation ends,
The second animation ends when the display of the second icon is completed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 9)
The game stand according to appendix 8,
The hold change display is a display that may be started for the hold icon by at least partly overlapping the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 10)
The gaming machine according to appendix 8 or 9, wherein
The hold change display is a display that can be started with respect to the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display even when the notice icon is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 8 to 10,
The notice icon is an icon that passes through a first position when approaching the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 8 to 11,
The hold change display is a display that is not performed on the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 5 to 12,
When the second animation is not displayed, the second icon and the first icon do not overlap.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 5 to 13,
The second animation is an animation that is not displayed during the electric support.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 5 to 14,
The second animation is an animation that is displayed only during Den Sapo,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 5 to 15,
When the first animation is started, the second animation may be started only when the hold icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 5 to 16,
The second icon is an icon displayed overlapping the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 5 to 17,
When the variation icon is deleted without displaying the first animation, the second icon and the variation icon do not overlap.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 18,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a1)
Display means;
A prefetch notice means capable of starting a plurality of prefetch notices,
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of animation,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the decorative design being displayed in a variable manner,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice,
The first icon and the second icon are different icons,
One of the plurality of types of anime is a first anime,
The first animation is an animation including an erase scene of the first icon,
The first animation is configured to start to be displayed between the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol and the start of the next variation display.
During the display of the first animation, the second icon is configured to start displaying at least partially overlapping the first icon,
The display of the second icon may not start during display of the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
The second icon is an icon that is overlapped with the first icon in the first animation and started to be displayed.
When the first icon is erased by the first animation, a display area where the second icon is displayed is expanded.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
A gaming table according to appendix a1 or a2,
A holding storage means capable of storing the starting information as holding,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a hold icon,
The display means is a means having a hold display area capable of displaying the hold icon,
It is configured to be able to display the number of suspensions of operation of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the number of the suspension icons,
The display means can display a display for changing the hold icon displayed in the first display mode to a second display mode different from the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “pending change display”). Means,
One of the plurality of prefetch notices is the hold change display,
One of the plurality of types of anime is a second anime,
The second animation is an animation including a moving scene of the second icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
A gaming machine according to appendix a3,
The second icon is an icon displayed as an icon suggesting the start of the hold change display,
The display of the second animation is started while the decoration design is stopped, and the second animation is completed while the decoration design is stopped.
By the display of the second animation, the second icon is configured to be closer to the hold display area than the position of the stop display of the decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
A gaming machine according to appendix a4,
The hold change display is configured to start displaying by overlapping the second icon with the hold icon that is the target of the hold change display,
The second icon is an icon that may be erased without overlapping the hold icon,
The second icon overlaps and the hold change display is performed rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is erased without overlapping and the hold change display is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easily displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
A gaming table according to appendix a4 or a5,
The second icon is an icon including at least a part of the hold icon of the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
A gaming machine according to appendix a3,
The second icon is an icon displayed as the pre-reading notice not related to the hold change display,
The display of the second animation is started while the decoration design is stopped, and the second animation is completed while the decoration design is stopped.
By the display of the second animation, the second icon is configured to be closer to the hold display area than the position of the stop display of the decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a3 to a7,
The display means includes a plurality of display devices,
One display device of the plurality of display devices is a first display device,
One display device of the plurality of display devices is a second display device,
The first display device is a display device capable of displaying the decorative design,
The first display device is a display device capable of displaying the first icon,
The second display device is a display device provided with the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a3 to a8,
One of the plurality of types of animation is a pending reduction animation,
When the hold icon is displayed, when the decoration symbol starts to change, the hold decrease animation is configured to start displaying.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a3 to a9,
The second animation is terminated by a stop display of the second icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a3 to a10,
The second animation is an animation that starts to be displayed after the display start of the first anime.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a3 to a11,
Main control means;
Sub-control means capable of receiving commands from the main control means;
A first symbol display means;
A second symbol display means;
With
The main control means is means capable of controlling the first symbol display means,
The sub-control means is means capable of controlling the second symbol display means,
The display means is means provided with the second symbol display means,
The symbol variation display by the second symbol display means is configured to be executed in conjunction with the symbol variation display by the first symbol display means,
The first animation is an animation that is started during the stop display of the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means,
The second animation is an animation started during the stop display of the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a12,
The first icon is an icon that is erased while the variation of the decorative design is stopped,
The game table according to claim 2, wherein the second icon is an icon that is displayed when the decorative symbol variation is stopped.
(Appendix b1)
Display means;
A prefetch notice means capable of starting a plurality of prefetch notices,
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “design variation display”),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of animation,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display during variation display,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed as the prefetch notice,
The first icon and the second icon are different icons,
One of the plurality of types of anime is a first anime,
The first animation is an animation including an erase scene of the first icon,
The first animation is configured to start to be displayed between the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol and the start of the next variation display.
During the display of the first animation, the second icon is configured to start displaying at least partially overlapping the first icon,
The display of the second icon may not start during display of the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
The first animation ends when the first icon is deleted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation display”),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the variation display during a certain variation (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”),
The second icon is an icon related to the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) performed after the first variation display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
After the stop display of the first variation display, the movement display of the second icon is performed,
The first display is a display that may be displayed after the first icon is erased until the moving display of the second icon ends.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c2)
The game stand according to appendix c1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of pre-read notice display,
The first display is the prefetch notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c3)
The game stand according to appendix c1 or c2,
The first display is a display that may be continuously displayed until after the start of the variation of the second variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c3,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a hold icon,
The display means is a means having a hold display area capable of displaying the hold icon,
It is configured to be able to display the number of suspensions of operation of the variable display by the number of the suspension icons,
The first display is a display that may overlap the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c5)
The game stand according to appendix c4,
The first icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area,
The second icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c6)
A gaming machine according to appendix c4 or c5,
The first display is a display that may overlap the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c7)
A gaming machine according to appendix c6,
When the first display overlaps the hold icon, an effect display in which the hold icon changes may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c4 to c7,
When the first display overlaps the hold display area continuously until the start of change of the second change display, an effect display in which the hold icon changes may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c6,
The display means includes a display area capable of displaying a plurality of types of tutorial displays (hereinafter referred to as “tutorial display area”).
The first display may be displayed in the tutorial display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c6,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to a plurality of types of stages,
When the first display is displayed when the first variation display is stopped, an effect display in which the stage changes may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c6,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
The first display is an effect display in which the meter display meter increases.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c12)
A game machine according to appendix c11,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of reach effect display,
When the meter of the first display is full, the reach effect display may be displayed after the start of the change of the second change display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c12,
The display means is means capable of displaying an animation for erasing the first icon (hereinafter referred to as “erase animation”),
The first display may start to be displayed during the display of the erased animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c12,
The display means is means capable of displaying an animation for erasing the first icon (hereinafter referred to as “erase animation”),
The first display may start to be displayed after the display of the erased animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c15)
The game stand according to appendix c14,
With operating means,
The first display is a display related to the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c13 to c15,
The first display may be displayed when the first variation display is stopped and the erase animation is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c16,
The first icon is configured to be erased in relation to the fluctuation stop of the first fluctuation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c17,
It is configured so that the movement display of the second icon is performed after erasing the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c18,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation display”),
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the variation display during a certain variation (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”),
The second icon is an icon related to the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) performed after the first variation display,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of animation,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a certain display,
One of the plurality of types of animation is an animation for deleting the first icon (hereinafter referred to as “first animation”),
After the stop display of the first variation display, the movement display of the second icon is performed,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed between the end of the first animation and the end of the moving display of the second icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d2)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
The second display means is a means having a display area smaller than the display area of the first display means,
The second display means is a liquid crystal display device.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d3)
A game machine as set forth in appendix d1 or d2,
The second display means is a means positioned in front of the first display means,
The second display means is a means having a display region capable of transmitting light emitted from the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d4)
A game machine according to appendix d3,
The second display means is configured to overlap the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d4,
The second display means is a movable means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
Equipped with a movable body,
The second display means is means provided on the movable body,
The movable body is moved during the display of the first animation, and the movable body is configured to overlap the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d6,
The second display means is means for not displaying the variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d7,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of pre-read notice display,
The certain display is the prefetch notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The certain display is a display that may be continuously displayed until after the start of the variation of the second variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d9,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a hold icon,
The first display means is a means having a hold display area capable of displaying the hold icon,
It is configured to be able to display the number of suspensions of operation of the variable display by the number of the suspension icons,
The certain display is a display that may overlap the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d12)
A gaming machine according to appendix d11,
The first icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area,
The second icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d13)
A gaming machine according to appendix d11 or d12,
The certain display is a display that may overlap the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d13,
The certain display is configured to start displaying during the display of the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d13,
The certain display may be displayed after the first animation is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d15,
The first animation is configured to be displayed during the period from when the first variation display is stopped to when the second variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d16,
The moving display of the second icon is performed after the display of the first animation is finished.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d17,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative symbol display device 224 Production movable body 226 General winning opening 228, 229 General drawing starting opening 230 Special drawing 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 232a Blade member 234 Variable winning opening 234a Door member 300 main Control unit 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control unit 800 Sub display device 900 Production movable body

Claims (18)

A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation display”),
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the variation display during a certain variation (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”),
The second icon is an icon related to the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) performed after the first variation display,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of animation,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a certain display,
One of the plurality of types of animation is an animation for deleting the first icon (hereinafter referred to as “first animation”),
After the stop display of the first variation display, the movement display of the second icon is performed,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed between the end of the first animation and the end of the moving display of the second icon.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The second display means is a means having a display area smaller than the display area of the first display means,
The second display means is a liquid crystal display device.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The second display means is a means positioned in front of the first display means,
The second display means is a means having a display region capable of transmitting light emitted from the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The second display means is configured to overlap the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The second display means is a movable means.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
Equipped with a movable body,
The second display means is means provided on the movable body,
The movable body is moved during the display of the first animation, and the movable body is configured to overlap the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The second display means is means for not displaying the variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of pre-read notice display,
The certain display is the prefetch notice display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
The certain display is a display that may be continuously displayed until after the start of the variation of the second variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The certain display is a display that may be displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10, Comprising:
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a hold icon,
The first display means is a means having a hold display area capable of displaying the hold icon,
It is configured to be able to display the number of suspensions of operation of the variable display by the number of the suspension icons,
The certain display is a display that may overlap the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 11,
The first icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area,
The second icon is an icon displayed in the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 11 or 12,
The certain display is a display that may overlap the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
The certain display is configured to start displaying during the display of the first animation.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
The certain display may be displayed after the first animation is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
The first animation is configured to be displayed during the period from when the first variation display is stopped to when the second variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
The moving display of the second icon is performed after the display of the first animation is finished.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 17,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

Images